Configuracion Andover

Configuration (Engineering)
 2011, Schneider Electric

All Rights Reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced, read or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without prior
written permission of Schneider Electric.
Produced in the United States of America.
Continuum Configuration (Engineering)

October, 2011
Part Number: 31-3001-757
The information in this document is furnished for informational purposes only, is subject to change
without notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by Schneider Electric. Schneider Electric
assumes no liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document.
Schneider Electric
One High Street
North Andover, MA 01845
978 975-9598
Fax: 978 975-9797
Manual Content
Chapters
1. Architecture
2. Starting Continuum
3. Menu Pages & Help System
4. Explorer Basics
5. Networks & Controllers
6. IO Modules & Comm Ports
7. Installation
8. Inputs & Outputs
9. Security Inputs & Outputs
10. Software Points
11. Schedules
12. Doors & Areas
13. Personnel Manager
14. EventView
15. Alarms
16. Video
17. ListViews
18. Groups
19. Reports
20. Advanced Explorer
21. Menu Pages
22. Graphics
Appendix
A: Personnel Editor & Templates
Schneider Electric - Buildings

Ch 1 Continuum
Architecture
Chapter Contents
Introduction
Standalone Architecture
Local Area Network (LAN) Architecture
Networking Rules
1-2 Continuum Architecture

Introduction
Continuum is a mixture of hardware and software that has been designed to monitor
and control the various functions of a building. These functions include, but are not
limited to;
security
access control
lighting
heating
ventilation
cooling
The hardware consists of equipment controllers, network communication controllers,

input and output interfaces. The Continuum software is a computer program that
allows someone to communicate with, monitor and control the operation of it all.
Continuum Workstation NetController
Infinet Controller I/O Module
Schneider Electric - Buildings 1-3

Standalone Architecture
In a stand alone configuration (shown below) the Andover Continuum product line
consists of:
CyberStation workstation with MSDE Database
Network Controllers
Input / Output (I/O) Modules
Infinet Controllers
The NetController/ACX/bCX1/9702 use Ethernet TCP/IP protocol to communicate with

the workstation.
Field bus communication between the NetController and the I/O modules is conducted
over a special ACC I/O bus.
Field bus communication between the network controller and the Infinet controller use
the Infinet protocol.
Power Supply & NetController II

Ethernet TCP/IP
(Standard CAT5 Cable)
Local IO Modules
ACC I/O Bus
Remote IO Modules
CyberStation / MSDE Database
3 Workstations Max.
Network Switch
bCX1
Comm 1 Infinet Comm 2 Infinet

Local Area Network (LAN) Architecture
The Andover Continuum system design is based on scalability, so expansion to a multi-
user, larger network configuration is easily accomplished. In this configuration, the
Ethernet LAN is expanded to include another workstation and an SQL database server.
SQL Server
Power Supply & NetController II I/O Modules
CyberStation
64 Workstations Max.

Networking Rules
Ethernet
Standard CAT5 cable

Stand Alone = 3 Workstations max (1 WS contains MSDE database).
Local Area Network (LAN) = 64 Workstations max. & separate SQL Server
Workstations ACCNetID = 191 – 254
190 Network Controllers max. (ACCNetID = 1 – 190)
IO Bus
120 Ω
120 Ω
RS-485
Proprietary LON Polling Network
32 Modules Max. / NetController
Shielded Double Twisted Pair Cable
2,000 Ft. Cable Run Max.
120 Ohm Termination at each end when modules are mounted remotely

Networking Rules
Infinet
 RS-485
 Proprietary token passing communication protocol
 Max 254 Infinet controllers per CX
 Max 127 Infinet controllers per Infinet
 Max 32 controllers or 4000 feet /segment
 Infilink Repeater used to extend segments
 Bus, Star or mixed configuration supported

Ch 2 Starting
Continuum
Chapter Contents
Starting Continuum and Logging On
Logging Off
Logging Back On
2-2 Starting Continuum

Starting Continuum
1. To start Continuum from the Windows desk top, select:
Start \ Programs \ Continuum \ Continuum
The Continuum splash screen will appear for just a couple of seconds.

Starting Continuum
2. The Continuum logon window will appear.
User Name: Enter your user name
Password: Enter your password
Unlike the user name, the password is case sensitive and must be entered
in lower and/or upper case based upon how the password was created.
If a password change is required, ask the Continuum Administrator for

assistance.
When typing the password, asterisks appear rather than the real characters.
This is a security measure to protect your password.
3. Select the OK button to complete the logon.
Continuum Main Screen

Logging Off Continuum
To log off, use the Continuum Icon located on the Windows task bar.
1. Right click on the Continuum icon located at the right of the Windows task bar
and select Logoff from the pop-up menu.
Continuum
Icon
After logging off, notice that the appearance of the Continuum Icon has a "Do
Not" symbol covering it.
Continuum Icon
when logged off

Logging Back onto Continuum
To log back onto Continuum, use the Continuum Icon located on the Windows task
bar.
1. Right click on the Continuum icon located at the right of the Windows task bar
and select Logon from the pop-up menu.
2. The Continuum logon window appears.
User Name: Enter your user name
Password: Enter your password
Unlike the user name, the password is case sensitive and must be entered
in lower and/or upper case based upon how the password was created.
If a password change is required, ask the Continuum Administrator for

assistance.
When typing the password, asterisks appear rather than the real characters.
This is a security measure to protect passwords.
3. Select the OK button to complete the logon.

Ch 3 Menu Pages
&
Help System
Chapter Contents
Menu Pages
Changing Menu Pages
Restrictions
Accessing the Help System
The Main Help Window
Navigating the Help System
The Browse Sequence
Hyperlinks
The Menu Table
Help Button
3-2 Menu Pages & Help System

Menu Pages
Menu Pages are the primary interface with Continuum. Menu pages are customized
graphic screens configured specifically for control systems. The screens contain
active areas (buttons or images) that when “clicked” start other processes, navigate to
other menu pages, or display other images. Continuum menu pages share the
following features.
Title Bar
Menu Area
(Hotspots
&
Buttons)
Status Bar
Alarm Bar
Task Bar

Menu Pages
Title Bar:
The Title Bar is located at the top of the screen and displays the title for the current
menu page.
Menu Area:
The Menu Area covers the entire region in between the Title bar and the Status bar.
Within this area, buttons and images are accessible to perform specific operations and
tasks.
Main Menu:
The Main Menu is located on the left side of the menu area and consists of the
following buttons:
- Graphics - Personnel
- Schedules - Explorer
- Groups - System & Status
- Reports - Windows Applications
Hot Spots:
Hot Spots are areas of a menu page that when clicked on:
Move you to another menu page

Launch a Continuum application such as Schedules or ListViews
Run a program
Create new objects such as Personnel
Hot spots may look like buttons clearly marked by text or icons, or they may simply
be key objects, such as a door, a boiler, or a controller, that are part of the overall
graphic.
Whenever the cursor traverses a hot spot, the cursor changes from an arrow to a hand.
Status Line:
The Status Line appears below the Menu area. Information displayed on this line
includes user name, current date and time, error messages, and prompts.
Alarm Bar:
The Alarm Bar is located below the Status Line. When an alarm condition occurs,
text describing the alarm appears in the white box. To respond to the alarm, click on
the appropriate icon in the bar for the action to perform (i.e., silence, acknowledge,
view report, etc.)
Task Bar:
The Task Bar displays information about active tasks, minimized windows, whether
logged on or off (the Continuum Icon), and the time.

Changing Menu Pages
The menu page system is composed of buttons. The buttons are active hot spots
linked to other menu pages or specific Continuum functions. Within the menu
system, there are two ways to move easily between pages.
Main Menu Buttons
Pop-up Menu
Main Menu Buttons

Four of the main menu buttons are tied to specific menu pages.
Reports
Personnel
System & Status
Windows Applications
Opens a ListView
Opens a ListView
Opens a ListView
* Opens a Menu Page
* Opens a Menu Page
Opens an Application
* Opens a Menu Page
* Opens a Menu Page
* Navigates to another menu page

Changing Menu Pages
Pop-up Menu
Another method of navigating is by using the pop-up menu system.
1. Move the mouse cursor to any part of the menu area that is not a hotspot and right
click to display the pop-up menu.
2. Select the Change Page option and then select the desired page.
Note: Because there is no menu button to display the main page, use this technique to
display Continuum's Main page.

Restrictions
The System & Status page provides access to Continuum functions usually reserved
for users with Administrator privileges. An Operator, can move from one menu page
to another, but may not be given access to restricted functions.
When an Operator is denied access to a particular function, a dialog box, similar to

the one shown below, will be displayed.
Note: While working in the Continuum environment, there may be situations where
an Operator will be denied access to a particular function. If this is the case, contact
the Continuum Administrator and request for the user privileges be modified.
Security Levels are varying levels of access privileges granted to users. The
privileges allow or deny access to perform functions within Continuum. Security
levels are configured by the Continuum Administrator.

The Help System
Accessing the Help System
Within Continuum, an extensive on-line help system is readily accessible. There are
two methods for launching the Help system.
Method 1:
Press the F1 key on the keyboard as instructed on the Status Line.
Status Line
Method 2:
Right-click on the Continuum icon in the lower right-hand corner in the
Windows Task Bar and select How Do I from the pop up menu.
Continuum Icon
Windows Task Bar

The Help System
The Main Help Window
When the Help system opens, a welcome screen will be displayed. The left side of the
window displays hyperlinked contents of the help system. Just below the graphic is a
hyperlinked table containing features of Continuum.
At the top of the Help application is a row of buttons that perform specific actions.
Button Description
Hides the menu system (Contents/Index) that is displayed on the
left of the Help application.
Displays the hidden menu system to the left of the Help

application.
Navigates backwards through previously viewed screens.
Navigates forward through previously viewed screens.
Displays the Welcome screen of the Help system.
Prints out the currently displayed topic.
Contacts Andover Controls Tech Support.

The Help System
Navigate the Help System
There are various ways to navigate through the Help system. Understanding how the
navigation system works allows for retrieving information quick and easy.
Clicking on a topic from the menu in the Contents window will display that
information in the viewing area. An Open Book Icon represents the selected topic.
Sub topics will be indented and listed below the selected topic.
Content Tab
Selected Topic
Sub Topics
Viewing Area

The Help System
Using the Index
The Index provides an alphabetical dictionary that is linked to its corresponding
contents.
Index Tab
Keyword
Viewing Area
Selected Topic
Display Button
Using the Keyword Prompt

The Index allows the user to type in a keyword that will instantly update the Index
menu area automatically. Basically, when typing each letter of the keyword, the
navigation process is taking effect.
Using the Display Button

Once a topic is highlighted, click on the Display button to view its information in
the viewing area.

The Help System
Using the Browse Sequence
Selecting the downward arrow in the Browse Sequence prompt will display a drop-
down menu of all the main topics.
The diagram below shows that the Continuum Explorer is selected as the main topic.
Just to the right is a row of all the sub topics related to the Continuum Explorer and
are all connected together with a line.
To navigate through these files, simply click on one with the mouse or by using the
buttons labeled Previous and Next. Clicking on these buttons will scroll through the
row of related topics one at a time and will be displayed in the viewing area for
review.
In the diagram below, notice the dynamic update between the Contents area and the
Browse Sequence area. Selecting a topic in one of these areas will automatically
update the other area.
Continuum
Explorer

The Help System
Using Hyperlinks
When reviewing information, some text will be blue in color and underlined,
indicating that this is a hyper link and will navigate you to the appropriate location
when clicked.
Hyperlinks

The Help System
The Menu Table on the Welcome Page
When scrolling down to the bottom of the page, there is a menu table in the viewing
area of the Welcome page. Notice that some of the text is blue and some is purple.
The blue color text indicates areas of the help system that have not been navigated to.
The purple color text indicates areas of the help system that have been navigated to.
Basically this table can be looked at as a memory bank of the path through the help
system. Looking at this table shows what topics have been reviewed.

The Help System
The Help Button
When working within a window in Continuum, in this case the Personnel Editor, a
Help button is present in the lower right corner of its window. Clicking this Help
button will launch the Help system and display the proper topic automatically.
Help Button

Ch 4 Explorer
Basics
Chapter Contents
Classes / Objects / Attributes
Explorer Overview
Objects
Object Name Vs. Object Alias
Folders & Class Folders
Navigation Pane
Viewing Pane
Creating a Folder
Default Folder
4-2 Explorer Basics

Classes / Objects / Attributes
Before using Continuum, it is important to know about objects and how Continuum
Explorer represents them.
Classes
A Class is a type of item within the Continuum system. There are many
Classes and each will be represented with a different icon.
Examples of classes are:
Devices
InfinityOutputs
Personnel
Areas
Graphics
Doors
Schedules
Programs
Objects
An Object is an individual item of a Class.
Attributes
Attributes are characteristics of an object that define or describe that object.
Each Class has a different set of attributes. There are some attributes that are
common to all Classes like Name and Description.
For example, some attributes of an InfinityInput object would be:
Value
Description
ElecType
State

Explorer Overview
Continuum Explorer is a tool in which control systems are configured and
maintained. A user must be logged into Continuum in order to open the Explorer.
There are 2 distinct sides to the Explorer: The Navigation pane and Viewing pane.
Title Bar
Menu Bar
Quick Pick Icons
Command Line
Navigation Pane
Viewing Pane
Title Bar:
Displays the Application along with the path to the selected object within the
Explorer.
Menu Bar:
Offers dropdown menus that are used for controlling and viewing a Continuum
system.
Quick Pick Icons:

Delivers quick access to commonly used features that reside within the menu
system.
Command Line:
Where Plain English commands are executed to either retrieve information or
carry out a particular task.
Navigation Pane:
Contains a hierarchy of objects that represent a control system.
Viewing Pane:
The viewing pane displays classes of objects owned by the objects you click on in
the navigation pane.
4-4 Explorer Basics

Continuum Objects (Icons)
Objects are the basic building blocks of Continuum. Each icon in Continuum
Explorer represents some type of object. Icons can represent a physical device like a
Controller, IO module or a Workstation. Icons can also represent storage locations
like a folder.
Objects are created within Continuum Explorer like Inputs & Outputs, Schedules,
ListViews, etc… and are defined by its type of icon.
Objects are categorized by Class type. Devices, points, personnel, areas, graphics,
doors, schedules and programs are a few examples of class type objects.
The characteristics of an object are defined by its attributes. For example, attributes
of a commport object are baud rate, description and default mode.
Navigation Pane Objects
Root Object
Network Object
Network Controller Object
Infinet Controller Object
Class Folders
BACnet Devices Object
Folders
Templates Folder
Workstation Object

Viewing Pane Objects
Shown here are just some of the icons displayed within the viewing pane. Every
object is defined by its own icon.
Network Controllers Comm Ports
Door
Infinity Inputs
Infinity Numerics
Infinity Outputs
System Variables
IO Modules
Alarms
Personnel
ListViews
4-6 Explorer Basics

Container Objects
Container objects are objects that contain other objects. For example, within a
Network object are Network Controllers and within a Network Controller are Infinet
Controllers. When an object contains or owns other objects, it is classified as a
container object.
The TrainingNetwork folder

is a container object that
contains a NetController.
The NetController is a
container object that contains
an InfinetController.
Class Folders are not considered to be container object.

Parent & Child Objects
The relationship between container and owned objects within Continuum Explorer is
with the terms parent and child.
The container object is the parent and the child objects are the objects owned by that
parent object.
Continuing down Continuum Explorers hierarchy, a child object that is itself a

container object contains children’s children.
The Root is the parent of the TrainingNetwork object (child), the NetController
object (children), the TCX controller object (children's children) and so on.
4-8 Explorer Basics

Object Name Vs. Object Alias
Each object in Continuum has two identifiers, a Name and an Alias. An object Name
can be lengthy and descriptive. Although an object Name and Alias can be the same,
an object Alias must conform to stricter naming conventions.
Object Names
When deciding on a name for an object, try to be as descriptive as possible.

Descriptive names help future users identify what the object is. For example,
if creating an output point for operating a fan, a descriptive name for the point
would be Fan Start/Stop.
The Name can be up to 64 characters long, and can include spaces,

underscores, dashes, slashes, and periods.
An object Name is stored in the Continuum database, but not at the controller.
Object Aliases
The Alias is the name of the object used in programs and functions.
Continuum creates the Alias version of an object name automatically when
creating a new object. The Alias, not the object Name, is saved to the
controller. The Alias is also saved in the Continuum database.
An object Alias can be no more than 16 characters in length, and can use only
alphanumeric (letters and numbers) characters, periods and underscores.
Aliases must start with a letter, not a number, and have no spaces.
An Alias cannot be either reserved words or keywords.

Folders & Class Folders
There are two types of Folders within Continuum Explorer, folders created by the
user and Class Folders that are created by Continuum.
Folders: Continuum allows objects to have two parents, the controller it is

attached to and a folder. Creating custom folders allows for flexible system
organization. That is different from controller organization. Folders are often
used to organize a group of objects independent of their physical location of
the controller in which they were created.
For example, Schedules can be stored within a Schedules folder, or all

Graphics Panels to a folder labeled Graphic Panels. When selecting that
particular folder, all objects of the same type will reside there.
Class Folders: Continuum creates Class folders and stores objects within
them. Class folders are easy to distinguish because they display an Infinity
symbol and contain only objects of a given class. Once an object of a certain
class is created in a controller, all subsequent instances of that class are
organized within the class folder.
Custom Created Folder
Class Folders
4-10 Explorer Basics

Navigation Pane
The navigation pane displays a hierarchical representation of a Continuum System.
The first icon (the Infinity symbol) that appears in the list is the root object. Below
the root object are folders, subfolders, and objects.
Continuum Explorer has 5 viewing options that effect how the Navigation Pane
displays its objects.
All Paths
Networks
Folders
Templates
BACnet
Selecting the downward arrow to the right of the Explorer Bars icon displays a list of
views to select from.
Explorer Bars Icon

Navigation Pane
All Paths View
All Paths view displays all objects on a Continuum system.
Networks
Controllers
Folders & Sub Folders
Templates Folder
Class Folders
Workstations
All Paths View

Navigation Pane
Networks View
Networks view displays all Networks and their associated objects.
Networks
Workstations
Class Folders
Networks View

Navigation Pane
Folders View
Folders view displays all folder types.
Folders & Sub Folders
Templates Folder
Class Folders
Folders View

Navigation Pane
Templates View
Templates view displays all template folders along with their associated sub folders
and class folders.
Templates Folder
Sub Folders
Class Folders
Templates View
BACnet View
BACnet Devices view displays all BACnet Network objects along with its devices.
BACnet Network Objects
BACnet Devices
BACnet Devices
View

Viewing Pane
The viewing pane displays classes of objects owned by objects within the navigation
pane and can display details about the objects.
The viewing pane can display the class folders or the objects in the class folders by
using the class folder and object buttons in the Quick Picks toolbar.
Objects
Class Folders
Displays Class Folders within a Displays all objects

selected container object within Class Folders

Viewing Pane
The viewing pane can display objects in four ways. Select the following four options
from either the views drop-down menu or by selecting the views icon until the desired
view appears.
Views Icon
Icon - Displays large icons in the Viewing Pane
Small Icons - Displays small icons in the Viewing Pane
List - Displays objects in a list in the Viewing Pane
Details - In Details view, objects appear in a vertical list displaying specific

information.

Creating a Folder
Folders are created at the root or within another folder and serve as container objects
for organizing objects based on class, location or function.
Upon creating a Folder object a new object dialog box will appear and prompt for
object name and alias. While entering the object name, the system automatically
creates a valid alias by taking the first 16 characters that comply with the alias rules.
The alias can be changed as long as its convention is maintained and no duplicate
exists on the same Continuum path.
Object Name Object Alias
Creating a Folder

A Folder has an attribute called Default Device. Depending on what this folder is
being used for, an operator may browse and select a controller in which all objects
created in this folder will be attached.
Default Folder
All controller objects have an attribute called Default Folder. An operator may
browse for and select a folder where all objects created within this controller will be
stored.

Ch 5 Configuring
Networks
&
Controllers
Chapter Contents
What is a Network
What is a Controller
Creating a Network Object
Network Editor
Commissioning the NetControllerII
Creating an InfinityController Object
InfinityController Editor
5-2 Configuring Networks & Controllers

What is a Network
A Network is a logical organization of InfinityControllers that know about each other
and have the ability to directly exchange data with each other. In most installations,
there is a single Network that includes all InfinityControllers in that system. A
Network is limited to a maximum of 190 InfinityControllers. To go beyond this
limitation, additional Networks must be created.
In large systems that have multiple Networks, the Network organization is typically
based on physical location, but not always. In some cases, Networks will be used to
isolate HVAC InfinityControllers from Security InfinityControllers.
What is a Controller
An InfinityController is a highly intelligent TCP/IP Network device that
communicates with a number of different intelligent and semi intelligent devices
through different communications interfaces. There are a number of different models
of InfinityControllers in both the 9000 series and 4000 series that can coexist on a
Network. InfinityControllers communicate with the CyberStation through the TPC/IP
network and provide a gateway to all of the devices that form a building automation
and/or a security system.
9000 series InfinityControllers provides a connection to Infinet controllers which are

used for the majority of monitoring and control applications. The 9900 and 9680
(NetController and NetController II) also provide a connection to IO modules for
additional monitor, control and Security applications.
All 9000 series InfinityControllers have an embedded Web Server that can provide
information directly to any computer on the same TCP/IP network

Creating a Network Object
Creating a Network object is the first step when setting up a Continuum system.
All controllers will be created off the Network object.
1. From Continuum Explorer, right-click on the Root object and select New and
then Network.
2. Enter the Object Name of the Network and select Create.
The Network Editor

General Page
Description:
Enter a description, up to 32 characters (including spaces) to describe the
network.

The Network Editor
General Page cont…
Time Zone:
Enter the Universal Time Coordinate (UTC) offset in minutes.
(The difference in minutes between your local time and (GMT) Greenwich Mean
Time)
300 means 300 minutes (5 hours) ahead of GMT
-300 means 300 minutes (5 hours) behind GMT
Offsets for the continental United States

Time Zone Offset
Eastern Standard Time (EST) -300
Central Standard Time (CST) -360
Mountain Standard Time (MST) -420
Pacific Standard Time (PST) -480
Alarms and Card Access Events are time stamped based on their local time. When
CyberStation reloads a controller, it sets the controllers time base on a difference
(if any) in the Windows time zone setting and the network time zone setting.
Default Folder:
Selecting a default folder will set up a relationship between this network and a
folder so that any InfinityController that is created in this Network will
automatically have its owner attribute set to the default folder and it can also be
viewed there. This setting is typically left blank for the Network.
Controller to Cyberstation DBsync:

This is a setting at both the Network and InfinityController editors that will
automatically send edit changes made through the dumb terminal interface or
service tool to the Cyberstation so that these changes will automatically be
reflected in the Database. This setting must be checked on both editors for these
DBSync messages to be sent. These DBSync messages are sent as unconfirmed
messages, Network communications problems or the Cyberstation being shut
down can lead to a mismatch between the controller and the Database. If
significant changes are made through dumb terminal, a save from controller to the
database should be performed (see advanced Explorer chapter) to insure that all
changes have been reflected in the database.
With this setting not selected, edit changes made through the dumb terminal
interface are not automatically sent to the Cyberstation

Commissioning the NetController
Before creating a NetControllerII (CX968x) within Continuum Explorer, the ACCNet
ID and IP Address of the NetController must be physically set through the
controller’s web server configuration pages.
Connections
Connect your workstation’s Ethernet port either directly or through a switch to the
CX968x’s Ethernet port.
Default settings
As received from the factory, the IP address settings for the CX968x are set to the
following defaults.
Setting Value
IP Address 169.254.1.1
Subnet Mask 255.255.0.0
Gateway Address 0.0.0.0
In order to establish a connection between your Workstation and the NetController,

your Workstation’s TCP/IP Properties must be configured.
Workstation TCP/IP settings:
IP Address: 169.254.1.2
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0

Commissioning Process
1. Run your Web Browser and enter the NetController’s default IP Address:
http://169.254.1.1/
http://169.254.1.1/
There are two user selections available on the Main page:
Controller Configuration Options

Custom Reports and Services
2. Select: Controller Configuration Options
For security reasons, the controller is password-protected. A logon dialog appears

over the initial page. At the logon dialog enter:
User Name: acc

Password: acc
3. Click OK to logon.

Commissioning Process cont…
After connecting to the IP address of the NetController II, the Controller

Configuration page appears.
The main page features two panes:
A Menu located on the left side for accessing the different configuration
pages. The options listed on the side navigation pane may differ based on
the controller software model, the options you have enabled, or additional
installed options supplied by TAC.
The Display shows the current controller configuration settings.

4. From the Menu select Controller Configuration
The Controller Configuration page appears. These fields are now editable.
The following table describes the Controller Configuration fields that you can
edit, as well as the action buttons.
Field Description/Action
Name Contains the name of the controller. You can enter any name you
wish in this field up to a maximum of 16 characters. Spaces
between name segments are not permitted.
Controller device names must be unique across a network

Description Enter a description of the controller up to 32 characters in length
(optional).
ACCNet ID Identifies each controller on an Andover Continuum network by a
unique number between 1 and 190. Each controller must have a
unique ID on its particular network.
IP Address A logical 32-bit address that identifies a TCP/IP host. Each
controller requires a unique IP address. Each address has two
parts: a network ID, which identifies all hosts on the same physical
network, and a host ID, which identifies a host on the network.

Field Description/Action
Subnet Mask Subnets divide a large network into multiple physical networks
connected with routers. A subnet mask blocks out part of the IP
address so that TCP/IP can distinguish the network ID from the host
ID. When TCP/IP hosts try to communicate, the subnet mask
determines whether the destination host is on a local or remote
network.
To communicate within a local network, computers and controllers

must have the same subnet mask.
Gateway Address The Gateway is the intermediate device on a local network that
stores network IDs of other networks in the enterprise or on the
Internet. To communicate with a host of another network, configure
an IP address for the default Gateway. TCP/IP sends packets for
remote networks to the default gateway (if no other route is
configured), which forwards the packets to other gateways until the
packet is delivered to a gateway connected to the specific
destination.
If you are using a proxy server, you must define a default router
here.
Probe Time Displays the time, in seconds, between controller probes.
A probe is a message that the device sends out to its controllers to

check their COMM status. Controllers respond to probe messages
to let the device know they are online. When a device does not
receive a response from a controller, it changes the controller's
COMM status to Offline.
Web Server Port The standard port for Web communications. The default setting is
80. The Web Server Port can be set to any number from 1 to
65,534. If changed, browser requests must specify the port number
in the URL, for example, http://<IP Address>:<Web Server Port>.
PPP IP Address Point-to-Point Protocol Address of the controller.
Transport Type UDP - This controller will communicate with other controllers and
Workstations primarily using the UDP protocol.
TCP - This controller will communicate with other controllers and

Workstations primarily using the TCP protocol.
TCP/UDP - This controller will communicate with other controllers

and Workstations primarily using the TCP protocol, but can also
speak to controllers and Workstations that communicate primarily
using the UDP protocol.
IO Configuration Allows the IO bus configuration to be either ACC LON or L-BUS.
Comm4 Port Line Allows Comm4 to be configured as either RS422 or RS485.
Action Buttons
Submit to Submit all form data to the controller. After submitting data, navigate
Controller to the Commit Changes page to write the changes to flash memory
and restart the controller.
Reset Form Undo any changes that were previously submitted.

5. Make the appropriate settings for the controller that will comply with the network
it will reside on.
Check with your System Administrator for the proper settings.
6. After making the proper changed, select the Submit to Controller button
located at the bottom of the page.
You will receive the following message informing you to select Commit
Changes from the menu.
7. Select Commit Changes from the menu.
The Commit Changes page appears.
8. To finish the procedure, select the Commit Changes / Restart Controller

button at the bottom of the page.

Creating an InfinityController Object
1. From Continuum Explorer, right-click on the Network object under which you are
adding a controller and select New and then InfinityController.
2. Enter the Object Name of the Controller.
3. Deselect the Put object in folder checkbox and then select Create.
General Page
Description:
Enter up to 32 characters of text to describe the physical characteristics or
functionality of the controller.
ACCNet ID:
Identifies each controller by a unique number between 1 and 190 for this network.
Each controller must have a unique ID per network.
Controller Type:
Select the controller type from the dropdown menu.
Comm Status:
Displays Online or Offline depending on whether the workstation is in
communication with the controller.

Out of Service:
Check the Out Of Service checkbox to place the controller in an out-of-service
(disabled) state. This creates a Return To Normal failure alarm on all
workstations with the associated AlarmEnrollment editor's Alarmed Attribute
value set to OutOfService.
It also allows you to clear unwanted failure alarms in the Active Alarm View, and
it prevents the controller from reporting additional failure alarms.
Personnel distribution cannot occur on the controller or its associated Infinet

controllers.
Network Security:
Check this checkbox to activate the TAC network security policy for this
controller.
Note: Network security is supported only in the NetController II model 9680 and
in the ACX controller models 5720 and 5740.
The TAC network security policy is a local security policy, established and
enabled through CyberStation, through the Network Security Configuration web
page and other web pages embedded in the controller, and through your Windows
Administrative Tools.
Network security secures communication between the controller and a

workstation using the Internet Security Protocol (IPSec) and the Internet Key
Exchange Protocol (IKE). It ensures authentication, integrity, and encryption of
IP data packets.
Probe Time:
A probe is a message that the device sends out to all controllers on the same
network to check their comm status. Controllers respond to probe messages to let
the device know they are online. When a device does not receive a response from
a controller, it changes the controller's comm status to Offline.
The frequency of probes is based on probe time.
Probe time should be left at the default of 60 seconds.
Location:
Enter up to 32 characters of text to describe the location of the controller.
Serial Number:
Displays the controller’s serial number. The Serial Number is retrieved from the
controller.

Version:
Displays the controller’s version number. The Version Number is retrieved from
the controller.
Default Folder:
Selecting a default folder will set up a relationship between this InfinityController
and a folder so that any object that is created in this InfinityController will
automatically have it’s owner attribute set to the default folder and it can also be
viewed there. This setting is typically left blank for the InfinityController.

General Page Buttons
IOU Modules:
The IOU Modules button checks the types of IOU models that are attached to a
CX9900 controller and displays them in a list.
Teach:
Teach is the application, which updates or "teaches" all Infinity controllers,
including the b4 controllers, about the CyberStation device and teaches all Infinity
controllers about each other.
Performing a Teach on the network allows you to select from three different
modes:
InfinityController Teach
Network Teach
Global Teach
When installing a workstation with an ACCNetID of 0, then it is not taught to the

CX Controllers.
Alarms and Events sent to the workstation with an ACCNetID of 0 will be

forwarded by a Workstation with an ACCNetID greater than 0 (191-254).

General Page Buttons cont…
Reset:
The Reset button deletes all programs and points stored on the controller.
Use the Reset button with caution, and only after saving the programs and points
to the Continuum database. The Reset button displays a window allowing to
cancel. When a Reset is performed, the only way to retrieve the deleted programs
and points is by reloading them from the Continuum database.
Update OS:
The Update OS button upgrades the controller’s operating system.
Selecting this button opens a window to load the update file. The operating
system will then be downloaded across the network.
Update IOUs:
The Update IOUs button updates the connected IOU modules with current
firmware distributed by Andover Controls. These files contain code that decides
which IOU modules to update.
Note that one .IOU file updates only a single type of IOU module.
Update Infinet2 OS:

The Update Infinet2 OS button upgrades the operating systems of all Infinet 2
controllers of a given model.
Selecting this button opens a dialog to locate and load the update file. The file is
sent to all Infinet 2 controllers to update their operating systems.

Network Page
Ethernet ID:
This is a read-only number that is assigned to the controller at the factory. The
first three numbers represent the manufacturer.
TAC is: 00:40:11
The next three groups of numbers represent the serial number, which has been
converted to hexadecimal.
IP Address:
This is a special identification number that TCP/IP uses to communicate with this
controller. Each controller and workstation will need a unique IP address. The
network administrator will assign the IP address for this controller.
Subnet Mask:
This group of numbers divides a network into sub-networks. This helps reduce
traffic by creating and isolating groups of controllers. Subnet masks indicate
which of the four numbers within a network's IP addresses will be used as sub-
network numbers. The network administrator will assign the network’s subnet
mask number.

Network Page
Default Router:
A router is a special device that manages communications with other networks. If
a network has a device designated to act as a router, each workstation or
controller must know the IP address of that device.
Enter the IP address of the device that has been designated to act as the router for
your network.
PPP IP Address:
This is a special identification number that PPP/IP remote access network uses to
communicate with this controller via a dial-up connection.
Max Response Time:

This number is the number of seconds the controller will wait before resending a
packet of information. The default value is 5 seconds.
This setting should not be changed without consulting Andover's Tech Support.
Controller to CyberStation DBsync:

Refer to the Network Editors General page.

Options Page
The Options page, displays the hardware options installed in the controller along
with XDriver settings for each comm port.
Xdriver:
Displays whether or not the driver is Disabled or Enabled.
A value of 0000 means disabled.

A value of 0001 means enabled
All other values in the four-digit hex number shown for each comm port are
Xdriver-specific bits set at the factory.
HCR:
Hardware Configuration Resource. Displays the current revision level of the
hardware.
Bootloader Version:
Displays the version of the controller's bootloader, represented by its bootloader
UPD file that you received from TAC.
Send Modem Init. String:

Displays whether or not the Send Modem Init. String is Disabled or Enabled.

Options Page cont…
Web Server:
Shows whether or not the Web Server feature of the controller is turned on.
Max Infinet Controllers:

Shows the total number of Infinet controllers that this controller supports.
SNMP:
Shows whether the advanced Simple Network Management Protocol is Enabled.
SNMP Alarming:
Shows whether the advanced Simple Network Management Protocol Alarming is
enabled.
Network Security:
Indicates whether or not this controller may be configured for network security,
which is a separately purchased option from TAC. If this entry says Enabled, it
means your site has purchased this option. If it says Disabled, it means your site
has not purchased this option.
Note: Only the NetController II model 9680, as well as the ACX controller
models 5720 and 5740, can support Network Security.
LAN:
Indicates whether or not the LAN card is installed.
Condition Level:
Displays whether or not the Condition Level feature is Enabled or Disabled.
Area Lockdown:
Displays whether or not the Area Lockdown feature is Enabled or Disabled.
Max IOU Modules:

Displays the maximum number of IOU modules that can be connected to this
controller.
ACC_LON I/O:
Displays whether the ACC_LON I/O has been selected.
LON:
Indicates whether or not a 9400 or 9410 controller has a LON Xdriver card
installed.

Options Page cont…
Modem:
Indicates whether or not the controller has an installed modem.
PCB Revision:
Displays the revision number of the controller's printed circuit board.
The TAC Technical Services department may ask for this number if calling in
with a problem related to this controller.

Ch 6 Configuring
IO Modules
&
Comm Ports
Chapter Contents
IO Modules
IO Module Comm Port
Creating an IO Module Object
The IO Module Editor
Replacing an IO Module
NetController Comm Port
Configuring the NetControllers Comm Port for Infinet
NetControllers Comm Port Editor
Infinet Controller Editor
6-2 Configuring IO Modules & Comm Ports

IO Modules
IO Modules are separate input/output units that physically attach to a NetController.
They provide controllers with the ability to interface with the outside world. Each IO
module can be easily attached to and detached from the NetController.
There are four varieties of IOU Modules:
- Input
- Output
- Access Control
- Display
AC-1 Module
IO Module Comm Port

The Continuum NetController CPU module includes a connector allowing power and
IO communications to all IO modules. Pins 1 & 2 (Comm A & Comm B) provide the
electrical connection for communications.
5
4
3
Pin 2: Comm B 2
Pin 1: Comm A 1
Creating an IO Module
1. From Continuum Explorer, right click on the NetController that owns the IO
module and from the drop-down menu, select New and then IOUModule.
2. Enter the Object Name for the module and select Create.
A good naming convention would include both the module type and IO number.

IO Module Editor
General Page
The General page is where an IO module is commissioned into the system and
brought on-line. There are 2 methods of Commissioning an IO module:
Using the Module ID field:
1. Manually enter the Module Id Number into this field.

(The Module Id number is located under the front panel of the module)
2. Apply this setting from the editor.
3. Refresh the editor.
Using the Learn button:
1. Select the Learn button.
2. Physically press the Commission button located on the front panel of the
module.

IO Module Editor
General Page
Description:
A good description of the IO Module object helps others when they need to test,
modify or manipulate the network.
Type up to 32 characters (including spaces) in the text box.
IOU:
Enter a unique number between 1 and 32 for each IOU module on a
NetController.
It is a good idea to label the IOU modules with the assigned number. This number
is used when configuring points on this controller.
Model:
The model number is supplied by Continuum and identifies the type of IOU
module.
Comm Status:
This displays Online or Offline, depending on whether the NetController is in
communication with the module.
Module ID:
The Module ID number is a unique number assigned to a module and is located
under its front panel.
Program ID:
This is a unique number that Andover Controls has assigned this particular unit
and appears after the Learn process. This number is needed when speaking to an
Andover Controls Support Representative.
Learn:
The IOU module Learn process commissions the IOU module. Module ID and
Program ID numbers are sent from the module to the Continuum workstation.
Wink:
The use of the Wink button is to confirm that the system recognizes the IOU
module. When selecting this button, the status light on the associated module will
blink on for 3 seconds.
Update IOU:
The Update IOU button lets you browse for an *.iou file when updating IOU
modules with new firmware.
This will be covered in detail in the Continuum System Administration course.

Replacing an IO Module
In the event of a damaged IO module, follow these basic steps:
1. Power down the IO bus.
2. Physically replace the damaged module.
3. Commission the replacement module either through the Module Id or learn /

Commission methods.
NetController II Comm Ports

The NetController communicates to devices through comm ports. A NetController
has four configurable comm ports. In order for a comm port to support the device to
which it is connected, it must be configured for that device.
The Comm Port Editor provides general information and specific settings that set up
the comm port to work with the device that are attached to the controller.
NetController II Comm Ports
Comm 1 Comm 2 Comm 3

Comm 4
Configuring the NetControllers Comm Port for Infinet

Only Comm 1 and 2 can be configured as Infinet ports on a NetController. Each
Infinet port on a controller can support up to 127 regular (building automation)
Infinet controllers and up to 31 priority (access and display) Infinet controllers.
1. From Continuum Explorer, select the NetController that is to be configured.
2. From the Viewing Pane, locate the comm1 or comm2 object and double click
on it.
Note: If only using one comm port for Infinet, use comm2.

The CommPort Editor
General Page
Description:
Enter a description, up to 32 characters (including spaces) to describe the function
of the comm port.
Comm Port:
Displays the number of the currently opened comm port.
Default Mode:
Selecting a mode from the drop-down menu sets the comm port default to that
setting.
Not Configured - Comm port does not support any communications protocol.
Infinet - Select this option if setting this comm port up as an Infinet port. An
Infinet port connects an Infinity controller to an Infinet network. The port
allows the Infinity controller to communicate with the Infinet controllers on
the network. When the default mode is set to Infinet, a third page is added to
the comm port editor called (Infinet Controllers). This page displays the
Infinet controllers that reside on the Infinet network that is connected to this
particular comm port. The Infinet controllers will not display until they are
Learned in from the Settings page.

The CommPort Editor
General Page
Default Mode: cont…
Printer - Select this option if connecting a serial printer to this port.
Command - Select this option when connecting a VT100 or VT200 type

terminal to this port and you want to have the terminal to display a command
line. To display windows and menus, select the Window option instead. To
switch between Window and Command mode, select the AutoSet option.
Lbus - Select this option to set up communications between the controller and
one or more IOU boards on an LBus. Lbus is only supported for comm4 on a
CX9200 or CX9300 controller and comm1 on a NetController. When Lbus is
selected on a NetController, IO modules cannot be used.
Autoset - Select this option if connecting a VT100 or VT220 type terminal to

this port and want to be able to switch between Window and Command mode.
This option displays a blank screen when the terminal is first turned on. Type
either Window or Command at the blinking cursor to select a mode.
TankNet - Select this option if using this port to connect to an Infinity level-
sensing probe.
Xdriver - Select if this port is using a customized external equipment driver

to connect to a special piece of equipment.

The CommPort Editor
Settings Page
Baud Rate:
Select the matching baud rate that is required by the equipment connected to this
port.
The baud rate represents the speed, measured in bits per second, at which the
controller sends information to the device that’s connected to the comm port.
For Infinet, leave the baud rate at its default of 19.2k
Track CXD:
This selection is used with a modem attached to this comm port and is selected by
default.
This option monitors a communications carrier detect signal called CXD. Track
CXD cleans up the comm port by logging off the last user.
If Track CXD is not selected, the controller has no way to respond to the loss of
the CXD signal.
This setting does not apply when default mode is set to Infinet, Lbus or TankNet.

The CommPort Editor
Settings Page cont…
Flow Control:
Chooses how the comm port is going to handle the flow of data between the
controller and its attached device.
The following options are:
NoFlowControl – Offers no control of regulating the flow of information

between the controller and its attached printer, modem, or terminal. Without a
flow control type, buffers that hold data that is being transmitted or received
could overflow and some data could get lost.
CtsRts - This flow control type uses hardware signals to send "clear to send"
(Cts) and "request to send" (Rts) messages. The controller and its attached
device must acknowledge both of these messages before information can be
transmitted.
XonXoff - This control flow type uses software signals in the form of
characters that are sent as part of the data being transmitted. When the
controller or its attached device detects that it has been sent a Xon character, it
makes itself available to receive data. It considers all data received after the
Xon character as valid. When it detects a Xoff character at the end of the data
stream, the controller or attached device knows the transmission is complete.
Current Mode - This is a read-only attribute that displays the current default
mode.
Flow control does not apply when Default Mode is set to Lbus, Infinet or
TankNet.

The CommPort Editor
Learn Button:
The Learn button is displayed only when the default mode has been set to Infinet.
Select the Learn button to initiate the process of discovering Infinet controllers
connected to this comm port. The Learn process assigns Infinet ID's to newly
added Infinet Controllers.
When the Learn process completes, Infinet controllers will be listed on the Infinet
Controller page of the editor.

The CommPort Editor
Infinet Controllers Page
When the Default Mode on the General page is set to Infinet, the Infinet Controllers
page will appear on this editor.
This page displays the Infinet controllers that reside on the Infinet network that is
connected to this particular comm port after a Learn has been performed.
The Infinet Controllers page consists of two columns:
Name:
The name displays as:
Local Controller Comm Port Learned in on
lc_xxxxxxx_2
Controllers Serial Number
CommStatus:
The CommStatus column displays either Online or Offline for every controller
listed in the Name column.
- Online indicates the InfinetController is communicating with the rest of the

network.
- Offline indicates the InfinetController is not communicating with the rest of

the network.

The InfinetController Editor
General Page
Description:
Text that describes the physical characteristics or functionality of the device.
Model:
Displays the model of the Infinet Controller that has been learned in.
Infinet Id:
A number assigned to this controller by the Infinity Controller during the Learn
process and determines the order in which the Infinet token is passed.
CommPort:
The comm port number that the Infinet Controller was learned in on.
BACnet Device Id:

Identifies the b3 BACnet controller by a unique number. Each controller must
have a unique ID.
Location:
Text that describes the location of the device.
Status:
Displays either Online or Offline, depending on whether or not the Infinet
controller is in communication with its attached Infinity controller.

General Page
Default Folder:
Allows a default folder to be chosen to store objects that are created from this
controller.
Backup to Flash:
Saves the Infinet i2 controller's RAM configuration to its flash memory, in
accordance with the attribute value that is set for the ACCRestartMode system
variable.
Update Infinet2 OS:

Upgrades the Infinet i2 controller's operating system by loading an update (.upd)
file.
Update BACnet b3 OS: (BACnet devices only)

Upgrades the BACnet b3 controller's operating system by loading an update
(.upd) file.

Runtime Page
Serial #:
Displays the serial number of the InfinetController that was Learned in.
Version #:
Displays the version number of the InfinetController that was Learned in.
Error:
Displays the last error to occur on the InfinetController.
Error Time:
Displays the time and date that the last error occurred.
Error Count:
Displays the number of errors that have occurred on the InfinetController. Up to
255 errors may accumulate. This number remains at 255 until it is reset to zero. A
Plain English program can be used to reset this attribute.

Runtime Page cont…
Reconfigs:
Displays the number of times the network has been reconfigured. The network
automatically reconfigures itself when it detects a communication error. A high
number of errors and a high number of reconfigurations means the network may
have a loose connection somewhere that is causing the communication error.
Reset:
Resets the controller and clears its memory. All points and programs in the
controller will be cleared.
Replacing an Infinet Controller

Follow this procedure when replacing an Infinet controller:
1. Power down the Infinet controller to be replaced.
2. Disconnect the wiring and remove the controller.
3. Install the replacement controller and connect the wiring, including the Infinet.
4. Apply power.
5. From Continuum Explorer, open the replacement controller’s editor.
6. From the Run Time page, enter the serial number of the replacement controller
and then select the Apply button.
7. From the General page, select the Window Refresh button.

At this point, the replacement controller should be displayed as On-line
If the controller is on-line, the procedure was performed correctly
If the controller is off-line:
o Check the serial number from the editor for typing errors
o Make sure the wiring has been properly connected
8. Reload the Controller
Note: A Learn is not performed when replacing an Infinet controller.

Ch 7
Installation
Chapter Contents
 Planning an Installation
 Avoid Equipment Damage
 Mounting the Controllers
 Power & Grounding
 Battery Back-up
7-2 Installation
Planning an Installation
Before You Begin
Before you begin an actual installation, it would be very wise to:
 Always read installation guide first

 Follow national and local codes
 Never compromise safety
 Document the installation
Plan the Installation

Map out where you plan to install each controller, terminal, workstation, and modem.
When planning sites, be aware of any electrical interference that may occur. You also
need to be aware of cabinet dimensions, power requirements, cable limitations, and
environmental requirements.
Be sure to read the installation guide carefully for each device before installing it.
 Any Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) information.
 Power requirements for each controller varies depending on the controller.

Some controllers support different input voltages.
 Any applicable procedures for changing the power configuration.

Choose Controller Locations
Each controller should be installed in an appropriate location:
 The location should provide for reasonable access for any future servicing.
 The location should not be below any water pipes or in enclosures that are not
watertight. Avoid any possibility of mold or mildew on or in the equipment—
such problems cannot be fixed because mold can corrode board etchings.
 The controller should not be located closer than 6 feet from any large electro-
magnetic device (motor, variable-speed drive, or transformer).
 The location must meet the environmental requirements specified for each
controller. This is especially important for rooftop units during temperature
extremes. For example, the unit may run, but the accuracy will start to drift,
or, if it’s extremely cold and the unit is turned off, it may not restart. Running
at high temperatures also reduces the life of the controller.
Avoid Electrostatic Discharge Problems

To avoid damaging electronic components because of the discharge of static
electricity, always ground yourself before touching any boards or other internal
components of Andover Controls’ devices. If the controller is correctly grounded, you
can ground yourself by touching its case. If possible, use a grounding strap or foot
ground.
 During all procedures, do all you can to reduce the generation of static
electricity:
 Do not move around a lot before starting the procedure.
 Once you have grounded yourself, immediately perform the operation so you
don’t build up a new charge.
 Do not slide components along any other surfaces, especially foam or plastic
packing material, or plastic or vinyl furniture.
7-4 Installation
Removing Boards
When removing a board or other components:
 Just before handling the component, ground yourself thoroughly by:
- Touching metal first
- If possible, use a grounding strap or heel plate
 Handle the board by the edges only, and don’t touch other components unless
absolutely necessary.
 Immediately place the component in an anti-static bag.
Installing Boards
When installing a board from an anti-static bag:
 Hold the bag
 Ground yourself thoroughly
 Pull the board out of the bag

Avoiding Equipment Damage
Common Sense Steps to Avoid Equipment Damage
 When drilling or removing knockouts in the cabinet for mounting purposes,

make sure no electronics are mounted in the cabinet.
 Remove all metal chips before mounting any electronics.
 Be careful when stripping wire not to drop small pieces of wire inside the
cabinet.
 Use the wire specified for the devices you are installing. Noncompliant wire
may not work, and may be dangerous to equipment or personnel.
 Don’t assume that a green grounding wire is connected. Make sure you
provide a copper path from the Infinet controller to the circuit breaker panel.
Surge and Transient Protection

The controllers have surge and transient protection designed and tested to industry
standards. In certain installations, especially where there are numerous power surges
and/or lightning events, additional protection may be required. There are many
devices that provide both filtering and surge protection. These devices are often a
combination of inductors, capacitors, and varistors.
24 VAC Step-Down
Transformer
AC Line
Power
Optional Varistor
Metal Oxide Varistor
(choose a voltage rating appropriate to the input
voltage applied. i.e 130V or 250V)
7-6 Installation
Mounting the Controllers
Most Andover Continuum Controllers are surface mounted meaning that they are affixed
by using screws onto a flat surface. Some controllers, like the NetController and its I/O
modules, have mounting brackets that allow you to mount them onto a DIN Rail.
NetController / IO Modules
The NetController and I/O modules can be mounted to a standard DIN rail or be directly
mounted to a panel by using screws. Hardware facilitating both mounting methods is
included as an integral part of the case design.
On the back of each module are molded DIN rail guide fingers. The design allows the
module to easily hook onto and slide along a standard DIN rail.
Special clamps are provided on the case that allow you to lock the module in place, once
it is in position.
These clamps, when extended, provide an alternative method of mounting to the DIN rail.
You can mount the module directly to a panel using the reinforced mounting holes
provided on each of the clamps.

Mounting the Controllers
Once the module is in the desired position, it is locked to the rail by pushing the bottom
clamps inward. After the bottom is secure, press the top clamp inward to complete the
operation.
Note: When installing I/O modules it is imperative that the installer supply a solid
Earth ground connection to the module.
7-8 Installation
Power & Grounding
Electrical Connections
When making any electrical connection, insure there is a good mechanical as well as
electrical connection:
 Strip wires back only as far as required for the connector being used.
 When using stranded wire, be sure that no stray strands contact any other
connection. A good way to avoid that condition is to either solder tin the wire or
to crimp a fork type connector on the end of the wire. If these are not available, be
sure to twist the wire before inserting it.
 Make Good Mechanical Connections!!!
Wire Routing and Separation

It is recommended that you run communications, input, and analog output wiring in
separate conduits, and keep them separate from any AC (60 Hz) wiring in the enclosure.
Any time unshielded wires run in parallel for more than 6 inches, enough capacitance
exists between the wires that transients can be coupled from one wire to another.
Each controller should have a dedicated power circuit. Powering a controller from the
source used by the equipment you are controlling is not recommended. This equipment
typically contains large inductive loads that can generate power sags and transients that
adversely affect the controller.
Use shielded wire when input and output wiring passes through an electrically noisy
environment.
Never lay wires across the surface of the printed circuit board. Wires should never be
within 1 inch (25.4 mm) of any component on the printed circuit board.
When wiring Thermistors with extremely long runs, be sure to check the installation
guide for ―Wire Gauge vs. Distance.‖
When wiring to a network, be sure to follow proper cabling requirements.

Power & Grounding
Building Ground Requirements
Be sure that all equipment from TAC is grounded to true Earth ground. True Earth
ground protects the equipment from transients and other power surges in the area.
Schneider Electric cannot guarantee that the controller system will operate as
documented without a properly grounded installation.
Each controller’s ground connection must be connected to the power distribution panel
through a copper wire of at least 14awg. Conduits, ductwork, cold water pipes, and
building steel are unacceptable ground conductors. Also, you cannot rely on incidental
wire-to-wire contact to establish proper grounding.
An example of a sub-standard ground is a galvanized steel cold water pipe. As the pipe
corrodes, it does not act as a true ground. The corrosion acts as an insulator, raising the
potential of the pipe with respect to the ground.
When lightning strikes in the area of the installation, it drastically changes the potential
of the Earth. Since properly grounded units respond to changes in potential more rapidly
than poorly grounded electrical systems, a poorly grounded building may try to reach
ground through the Continuum system. The surge of current can destroy electronic
components on the controller board. Surges of much lower potential than lightning also
impact the reliability of the equipment.
Inspecting the Ground

Be sure to have your grounds inspected before you begin the installation process to
ensure your municipality follows the National Electrical Code. Many municipalities do
not follow the code and often have substandard electrical grounds. Check your ground as
follows:
Inspect the building power distribution panel for Earth-ground termination. If the ground
termination is any of the following, it is not adequate and must be corrected:
 Does not exist.

 Is connected to a corroded or galvanized pipe
 Is connected using a small gauge wire (less than 14 AWG)
Be sure your Continuum cabinet is connected to the ground with a copper conductor that
terminates at the distribution panel.
Lightning Protection
Although metal oxide varistors are built into the board to protect against power line
transients, this protection is not sufficient to protect against lightning. Lightning arresters
are required at each point where field bus cables enter or exit a building.
The following lightning arrester is recommended:
 TAC # 01-2100-299, two pair gas tube lightning arrester
7-10 Installation
Power & Grounding
Power Supplies
The Continuum power supply modules are part of the Andover Continuum Ethernet-
based intelligent building system. The Continuum system allows you to cost effectively
mix and match DIN rail-mounted CPU, power supply, and various combinations of I/O
modules and user interfaces to meet your control and monitoring needs. The power
supplies offered include an impressive array of features.
Along with the standard 120/240 VAC modules, some models reduce or eliminate the
impact of power failure through a built-in battery back-up system with integral charger.
Another allows – 48VDC power based industries such as telecommunications to provide
uninterrupted power to critical environmental monitoring and control equipment using
their own battery-backed power systems.
Each module includes provision for an optional AC power indicator LED. This option is
ideal if you mount your Continuum system within a larger control panel or enclosure and
wish to verify power to the system from a separate location.
The power supply modules feature a sleek, lightweight casing designed for natural
convection cooling. Quick-release fasteners, built-into the back of the module, are
provided for DIN rail mounting - no tools required. These fasteners also snap into a
locked position that features integral reinforced holes for panel mounting in non-DIN
situations.
The following table lists the features included in the Continuum Power Supply Modules:

Power & Grounding
AC Power Connection
(AC 50, AC 85, AC 50-U, AC 85-U, PS 120/240 AC 25)
All the PS 120/240 power supply modules are powered by an external AC source. This
source is connected via three screw terminals located inside the cover at the bottom of the
unit. The module should receive power from its own independent, 120-240 VAC, 50 or
60 Hz, 100 VA, unswitched circuit.
In order to access the connector on older power supplies, you must remove the plastic
cover from the case. The input power fuse for all power supplies is also under the cover.
To access, press both cover removal tabs inward simultaneously:
7-12 Installation
Power & Grounding
AC Power Connection
(AC 50, AC 85, AC 50-U, AC 85-U, PS 120/240 AC 25)
The AC connection consists of two terminals (Hot and Neutral) from the power-line and
a third wire tied to a common Earth ground.
 High voltage AC Power wiring should be routed to the conduit opening

nearest the AC power terminals.
 Do not bundle or route AC Power wiring with low voltage input or output
wiring.
 Be absolutely certain that your USA installation complies with all aspects of
the National Electric Code, NFPA 70. Be especially sure that your system is
properly grounded.

Power & Grounding
Connecting Grounds
(AC 50, AC 85, AC 50-U, AC 85-U, PS 120/240 AC 25)
The power supply must be connected to true Earth ground. When used in an enclosure, be
sure to connect the enclosure to Earth ground as well. The Continuum enclosure includes
a special chassis ground stud that can be found at the lower left bottom of the inside as
shown below. Connect your grounds at that point.
7-14 Installation
Power & Grounding
DC Input Power Connection
(PS –48 DC 50)
The PS –48 DC 50 power supply module is powered by an external 2 Amp -48VDC

Nominal Input voltage -15% / +10% UL listed source. This source is connected via three
screw terminals located at the bottom of the unit.

Power & Grounding
UPS Connections
Backup Battery Connection
The PS 120/240 AC 50-U and AC 85-U power supplies include provisions for connecting
an external lead-acid battery supply to power the system in the event of a main AC power
failure.
An external 24 Volt battery pack may be sized to provide the hold-up time specified by
system requirements. Using standard 12V or 24V batteries, (120 to 160 W-Hr), the built-
in UPS circuitry provides a backup time of 60 minutes @ 35 Watts power consumption.
The integral 15 Watt battery charger has a worst case charging time of 48 hours with two
(2) 12V, 7.0 A-Hr batteries.
For UL 1076 applications, two 12 VDC 40A-Hr batteries insures a supply that will power
approximately 5 hours of back-up operation.
To protect the batteries, the battery cutoff circuitry will activate at 20.4 volts.
The external battery pack connects to the module through a two-position screw terminal
connector. Replacement of the external battery for maintenance purposes may be
performed while the unit is AC powered without interruption of service.
7-16 Installation
Power & Grounding
External Power Indicator Connection
All Continuum power supply modules include a connector for an external LED power on
indicator. The signal from this connector is active when the power supply is turned on
and receiving input power (AC or DC).
Connection is via a two pin removable female Molex connector # 14-56-7022 (not
supplied). Wire the external LED as follows:
Bottom of Case
An optional cable assembly is available. Part number 01-0010-422 is a 2 foot (60 cm)
cable that includes the LED and connector.

Power & Grounding
Output Power Connection
The power output connector is a five pin male assembly that is designed to easily insert
directly into the left side (input) connector of any CPU or I/O module. The signals within
that connector are as follows:
All the Continuum power supply modules (except the AC 25 model) generate a +24 VDC
source for all other modules in the system. The PS 120/240 AC 25 power supply
generates +5 VDC. This power source is located on pins 4 and 5.
The UPS versions of these supplies include two power status signals on pins 1 and
2. Their function is as follows:
 AC Power is a logic signal that is intended to communicate to an attached CPU

module that AC power is available. When AC is interrupted and the power supply
has switched to UPS battery mode, this signal presents a logic low to the CPU.
The CPU can use this signal to start an orderly system shutdown.
 Low Battery is a logic signal that is intended to communicate to an attached CPU

module that the voltage of the battery has dropped below 22 Volts. When the
power supply is in UPS battery mode, this signal presents a logic high to the CPU.
Should the battery voltage drop, this signal switches to a logic low. The CPU uses
this signal to start an orderly system shutdown.
Warning
Make sure that AC power is not applied (switch is off) to the power supply while you are
connecting the CPU module or IOU modules. Module could be damaged or you could
receive an electrical shock that is life threatening.
7-18 Installation
Power & Grounding
Auxiliary Power Connection
PS 120/240 AC 50(U), AC 85(U)
In situations where a large number of I/O modules are used, the power available from one
supply module may not be sufficient. In these scenarios an auxiliary power supply can be
connected to supply necessary power to the extended I/O group.
All Continuum power supply models can be used as auxiliary power supplies.
However, the UPS versions must be modified slightly before it is used.
Generally the auxiliary power supply is added to a remotely located group of I/O
modules. The I/O modules that are to be powered by the auxiliary supply still connect to
the other modules so that data may flow between the functional blocks of the system,
however, these I/O modules must receive power from only the auxiliary supply. A 2-
conductor shielded cable eliminating the 24 VDC signals (pins 4 & 5) is connected
between the last I/O module powered by the main power supply and the remotely located
I/O modules powered by the auxiliary supply:
From I/O To I/O

Modules Modules
powered by powered by
Main power Aux. power
supply supply
Communications Cable

Power & Grounding
Converting PS 120/240 AC 50-U and AC 85-U into an Auxiliary Supply
The UPS versions of the 120/240 AC power supply include two status signals that are
meant for use by a CPU module. When connecting directly to an I/O module you want to
eliminate these signals.
There are two versions of the printed circuit board within the Power Supply.
One includes a mode switch; the other requires components to be removed.
On newer versions of the supply, a Mode switch inside the cover allows these signals to
be easily disabled. In order to access these components you must remove the plastic
cover from the case.
Auxiliary Mode
Normal Mode
7-20 Installation
Power & Grounding
Converting PS 120/240 AC 50-U and AC 85-U into an Auxiliary Supply
On older versions of the supply, two jumper components must be removed from the
printed circuit board. In order to access these components you must remove the plastic
cover from the case.
ESD Warning
To avoid damaging electronic components because of the discharge of static electricity,
always ground yourself before touching any boards or other internal components of
Andover Continuum devices.
• At the very least, discharge yourself by touching metal first.
• If possible, use a grounding strap or heel plate.

Power & Grounding
The CPU module is powered by an external 24 VDC source. This source is normally
supplied by one of the Continuum Power Supply modules; however you can attach a third-
party supply to the NetController. The input power connector is located on the left side of
the CPU module case and consists of five pins.
The power input connector is a five-pin male assembly that is designed to easily insert
directly into the right side (output) connector of any Continuum Power Supply module.
The signals within that connector are as follows:
It is assumed that the CPU is directly connected to a power supply module as shown
below:
The power supply generates a +24 VDC source for the CPU and all other modules in
the system. This power source is located on pins 4 and 5. Pin 3 (Ground) is intended
as an Earth ground connection.
The NetController consumes a maximum of 10 Watts of 24VDC power.
7-22 Installation
Power & Grounding
NetControllers & IO Modules
Third Party DC Power Connection

In situations where a large number of I/O modules are used, the power available from the
standard Continuum power supply module may not be sufficient. In these scenarios you
can either use an auxiliary power supply for the extended I/O group or you can replace
the main power supply with one that can handle the entire job.
When using a third-party power source to supply a Continuum system it is necessary that
you connect the power as shown below. Normally all power flows from the supply and
through the NetController. Third party supplies should connect directly to the I/O module
power bus. That way the internal current limitations of the NetController do not detract
from your system design.

Power & Grounding
Earth Ground Connection

To insure reliable operation under all adverse conditions, the CPU module must have a
wire connected to it and Earth ground. The wire should be as short as possible, ideally
6‖ or less, and the wire gauge should be a minimum of 18 AWG. Pin 4 of the COMM 2
connector located on the bottom of the CPU module case as shown below.
Continuum Enclosure Grounding

If you are installing the CPU into the Continuum enclosure, there is an Earth ground stud
pressed into the back-plate in the lower right of the case. Connect the ground wire from
pin 4 of the connector to this stud provided.
7-24 Installation
Power & Grounding
I/O Module Earth Ground Connection
If the panel backplate is grounded and the I/O modules are DIN rail mounted on DIN rail
that is screwed into the panel backplate, the I/O modules may use the built-in ground clip
and/or may be individually grounded via the earth ground connection on the terminal
block terminal one.
If I/O Modules are Surface mounted using the extended mounting tabs, the I/O modules
must be grounded using Terminal one of the terminal block.
Surface
Mount Earth Ground
Connection

Power & Grounding
Output Power-I/O Connections

The Continuum NetController CPU module includes a connector on the upper right side
of its case for further distribution of the 24 VDC input power and special I/O
communications signals to all I/O modules. Continuum I/O modules use these signals for
power and communications.
The power-I/O connector is a five pin male assembly that is designed to easily insert
directly into the left side connector of any I/O module. The signals within this connector
are as follows:
The main system power supply generates a +24 VDC source for the CPU. This power
source is received through the input power connector on the left side of the CPU module
and sent through to pins 4 and 5 of this connector.
All the Continuum I/O modules can operate at 24V. Some have extended ranges to allow
operation at lower voltages. Refer to the individual specifications for each module.
Communications between the CPU and I/O modules is through a two-signal serial
interface that is factory configured as either RS 485 ACC-LON or FTT-10A.
Pins 1 and 2 (Comm A and Comm B) provide the electrical connection for this interface.
Pin 3 (Shield) is the communications signal shield connection. This is not an Earth
ground connection. Proper shielding requires that the installer connect all shields
together. The CPU (if grounded properly) provides the single Earth ground point for all
modules. Each I/O also has its own Earth ground connection. Data cabling
specifications and requirements are discussed in detail in Chapter 12 The I/O Bus.
7-26 Installation
Power & Grounding
Connection of I/O Modules

The CPU can directly connect to I/O without the use of cables through a system of built-
in plugs and jacks. All I/O modules include two complementary module inter-connectors.
Creating a system is as simple as physically plugging the modules together.
In vertical extended systems, I/O modules may be located above or below other modules.
In this case, cable assemblies bridge the I/O modules together.
The cables necessary to connect the CPU and external I/O modules are attached using a
plug-in screw terminal connector. Connection between the modules is one-to-one
straightforward wiring as shown below:
The wire color scheme for the I/O bus cable may vary from site to site, but should be
standardized at a site to reduce the chance of confusion.

Power & Grounding
Maximum number of I/O Modules

The Continuum system allows for a maximum of 32 I/O modules per CPU. There is also
a limit based upon the capacity of the power supply feeding the modules.
Note: It is possible to insert auxiliary power supplies into the I/O bus to increase the
number of modules supported up to the maximum of 32. The Power Supply Reference,
30-3001-702, includes information on auxiliary supply installation.
• PS 120/240 AC 50 U, UPS power supply: 35 Watts of power available

• PS 120/240 AC 50, non-UPS power supply: 50 Watts of power available
• PS –48 DC 50, Battery operated power supply: 50 Watts of power available
• PS –48 DC 50 U, UPS Battery operated supply: 50 Watts of power available
UPS power supplies (except the –48 DC 50 U) include battery charging circuitry that
consumes 15 Watts of the total power available. This is why the UPS supplies are listed
with less available Wattage.
To determine the maximum number of I/O modules each power supply can support,
subtract the power requirements for each module from the maximum available per
supply.
If the supply also powers the NetController CPU be sure to subtract the 10 Watts it
consumes.
Power requirements for the NetController and each I/O module*
7-28 Installation
Power & Grounding
I/O Bus Power Cable (Pins 4 & 5)

You should use shielded cable for the power lines, pins 4 and 5, to ensure noise immunity
and therefore more reliable operation. The shield would be connected to pin 3 as is the
shield of the data cable.
I/O Module power requirements are as follows:
Module I/O Bus

I/O module DC Supply Voltage Installation Notes
UI-8/UI-8-10 10-28 VDC 24 VDC for UL 864 and UL 294
DI-6-AC 20-26 VDC
DI-8 10-28 VDC 24 VDC for UL 864 and UL 294
MI-6 20-26 VDC 24 VDC for UL 864 and UL 294
DM-20 20-26 VDC 24 VDC for UL 864 and UL 294
AO-4-8/AO-4-8-O 20-26 VDC 24 VDC for UL 864 and UL 294
DO-4-R 10-28 VDC 24 VDC for UL 864 and UL 294
DO-6-TR 20-26 VDC 24 VDC for UL 864
LO-2/LO-2-O 20-26 VDC External 28V required to Power Relays
DIO-20 24 VDC
AC-1 20-26 VDC 24 VDC for UL 294
AC-1A 10-28 VDC 24 VDC for UL 864 and UL 294
AC-1 Plus 10-28 VDC 24 VDC for UL 294
VS-8-4/VS-8-4-T 10-28 VDC 24 VDC for UL 294
VT-1 20-26 VDC
The gauge of the power cable is determined by the power it carries. As indicated
previously, the longer the wire the more voltage drop. Do not allow the power supply
voltage measured at the furthest remote module to drop more than the allowable amount:
24 VDC modules: 2V (1V for the power run and 1V for the return run)
10-28 VDC modules: 12V (6V for the power run and 6V for the return run)
Voltage drop can be calculated by using Ohms Law:
Voltage = Current x Resistance

Power & Grounding
Power Wiring Guideline Table
The following is a conservative estimate of typical power consumptions and their related
wire gauge and number of feet:
These tables are intended as a guide. There is no way to account for every Continuum I/O
permutation. External noise suppression may be required if the power wiring is run in a
noisy environment.
Powering Other Infinity Controllers

Powering Multiple Controllers with a single 24VAC Source
Unless all the controllers you intend to power are resident in the same cabinet, it is
imperative that you use a separate transformer for each controller. When you attempt to
power multiple remotely located controllers from a single power source, the voltage drop
caused by the current draw per controller can result in marginal operation and may
prevent proper communications between controllers.
7-30 Installation
Power & Grounding
bCX1 Series Controller
24VAC Connection
The bCX1 series controllers can be powered by an external 24 VAC source. This power
supply is connected via three terminals located on the Power connector. The unit should
receive power from its own independent, 24 VAC ~ +10% or -15%, 50 or 60 Hz, 40 VA,
un-switched circuit.
The Power connector is located on the left side of the module case (as viewed from the
front) and consists of three screw terminals.
The 24 VAC connections are as follows:
Optional Varistor
AC Line
Power
24 VAC Step-Down
Transformer AC POWER
24 VAC
20 VA
50/60 HZ
X1 X2
1
2 N
3 L +
DC POWER
12 – 28 VDC
25 W
The 24 VAC connection consists of both terminals from the secondary of a power-line to
24 VAC transformer. Connection to the Controller is via a screw-type connector. The
ground wire to the controller should not exceed 12 inches in length and it must be
connected to a good earth ground.

Power & Grounding
12 - 28 VDC Connection
The bCX1 series controllers can be powered by an external 12-28 VDC source. This
power supply is connected via three terminals located on the Power connector.
The Power connector is located on the left side of the module case (as viewed from the
front) and consists of three screw terminals.
The 12-28 VDC connections are as follows:
AC POWER
24 VAC
20 VA
50/60 HZ
1
VDC Return 2 N
+ 12 – 28 VDC 3 L +
DC POWER
12 – 28 VDC
25 W
7-32 Installation
Power & Grounding
i2/b3 Series Field Bus Controllers
Power Connections
The i2 and b3 Series Controllers are operated via an external power source. An internal
power converter creates the necessary DC voltages to supply the microprocessor
circuitry.
Powering Multiple i2/b3 Series Controllers

Unless all the i2/b3 Series controllers you intend to power are resident in the same
cabinet, it is imperative that you use a separate transformer for each controller. When you
attempt to power multiple remotely located controllers from a single power source the
voltage drop caused by the current draw per controller (realize that actuators may be
using power from the controller as well) results in marginal operation and in most cases
prevents proper communications between controllers.
The following lists indicate the primary power sources for each controller. As indicated,
some of the controllers listed include multiple power source choices.
Controller Power Options

Power & Grounding
24VAC Connections
When using a 24V AC source, this power supply is connected via three terminals
located on the Power connector. The unit should receive power from its own
independent, un-switched circuit.
The Power connector is always located on the left side of the module case (as viewed
from the front) and consists of three screw terminals.
The 24 VAC connection consists of both terminals from the secondary of a power-line to
24 VAC transformer. Connection to the Controller is via a screw type connector. The
ground wire to the controller should not exceed 12‖ in length and it must be connected to
a good earth ground.
7-34 Installation
Power & Grounding
The 24VAC connections are as follows:
 i2/b3 600 Series

Optional Varistor
AC Line
Controller
Power
24 VAC Step-Down
Transformer
X1 X2
N
L
i2/b3 865/866 24VAC Connection
24 VAC Step-Down
Transformer
AC Line
Power
Optional Varistor

Power & Grounding
i2/b3 867 24VAC Connection
24 VAC Step-Down
Transformer
AC Line
Power
Optional Varistor
24 VAC Step-Down
Transformer
Optional Varistor
7-36 Installation
Power & Grounding
24 VAC Step-Down
Transformer
AC Line
Power
Optional Varistor
(choose a voltage rating appropriate to
the input voltage applied. i.e 130V or
250V)

Power & Grounding
12 - 28 VDC Connection
Some i2/b3 Series controllers can be powered by an external 12-28 VDC source.
This power supply is connected via terminals located on the Power connector.
The DC connections are as follows:
i2/b3 600 Series

i2/b3 800 Series
i2/b3 810 Series
Controller
7-38 Installation
Power & Grounding
115 - 230 VAC Connection
The i2/b3 887-L and the i2/b3 920 controller are the only controllers powered by an
external AC mains source.

Battery Backup
Battery Backup Methods
We use two different battery backup methods on our controllers:
 CX and ACX 780 controllers use lead acid batteries
 Infinet controllers use lithium batteries
For more information on battery backup methods for a particular Andover Controls
device, refer to its installation manual.
Lead Acid Batteries

CX and ACX 780 controllers use sealed lead-acid batteries. These 12V 6.5Ahr
batteries provide 1 to 4 hours of backup time, depending on the configuration. The
sealed lead-acid batteries have a useful life of approximately two years, which
degrades over time.
To test a battery, you must place a load equivalent to that the controller places on the
batteries for an extended period of time. You must monitor the batteries during the
test and stop as soon as the voltage reaches 21V. If you continue the load below 21V,
permanent damage to the batteries will result.
For example, two 12V batteries in series produce a 24V battery system. To find the
resistance needed to produce a 2-amp load, use the formula:
R = V / I = 24/2 = 12 ohms
Warning: Be careful of the wattage: P = E * I = 24 * 2 = 48 Watts. This requires a

high quality, 12-ohm, 50-watt resistor, which will get very hot!
It may be more economical and reliable to replace the batteries every two years,
rather than depending on testing to tell you they are still acceptable. The more they
are used, including testing, the weaker they get.
Lithium and Nickel Metal Hydride Batteries

The I2 and B3 controllers use Lithium batteries that backup the SRAM memory only.
They provide an accumulated 5 years of backup time. They are field replaceable on
most products.
The ACX 57XX controllers use NiMH batteries that backup SRAM including all
personnel records for up to 10 days. They are field replaceable.
Netcontroller II controllers use NiMH batteries that backup SRAM including all
personnel records for up to 7 days. They are field replaceable.
7-40 Installation
Ch 8 Infinity
Input / Output
Points
Chapter Contents
 InfinityInputs & InfinityOutputs
 InfinityInput
 Creating an InfinityInput
 InfinityInput Editor
 Technical Information for Inputs
 InfinityOutput
 Creating an InfinityOutput
 InfinityOutput Editor
 Technical Information for Outputs
8-2 Infinity Input & Output Points

InfinityInputs & InfinityOutputs
Within the Continuum system, InfinityInputs and InfinityOutputs are defined as
"hardware points".
 InfinityInput - An InfinityInput is a point that measures an incoming signal.
 InfinityOutput - An InfinityOutput is a point where an outgoing signal

controls a device.
InfinityInput
An InfinityInput is a connection to an Infinity or Infinet controller that monitors
incoming signals.
Inputs can monitor items like temperature, humidity, water pressure and airflow.
When creating an InfinityInput point, certain attributes are configured, which are
characteristic of the point. Attributes for an InfinityInput point would include value,
units, electrical type, display format and threshold.
An InfinityInput can monitor a variety of sensor types:
- Contact Closures - DC Voltage Signals

- Thermistors - AC Voltage Signals
- Voltage & Current Transducers - Supervised Contact Closures
- Current Sensors
Creating an InfinityInput
1. Right click on the controller to which you want to add an InfinityInput and
from the drop down menu, select; New / InfinityInput.
2. Enter the Object Name for the InfinityInput point and select Create.
(If changing the alias, conform to its convention)

The InfinityInput Editor
General Page
Value:
The value of an InfintyInput is automatically updated by the system based on
what is physically connected to the input and how the input is configured.
Units:
The Units attribute provides context for the Value attribute. This can be up to 12
characters including spaces.
When configuring a Digital point, it is a good idea to define the On value.
Examples:
 Deg. F
 %RH
 PSI
 Alt248 =  (Degrees)
 On = Open or Motion

Description:
The description can be up to 32 characters including spaces. The description is
often used to customize alarm messages with specific information for this point
State:
When an input is enabled, its value is automatically updated by the system. A
disabled input’s value will not be automatically updated. A disabled input can
have its value manually set and it will hold that value. Once the input is enabled,
the system will automatically update the value upon the next change of signal on
the input.
Exported:
Exported is a read only attribute that is set automatically when either an alarm is
configured for this point or this point is referenced from a program in another
controller.
Alarms:
This is a read only attribute that displays which alarm conditions are currently
active on this point.

Settings Page
Elec-Types
ElecType:
The ElecType defines how the controller will interpret the DC voltage measured
at the input connection. Internally, the input is connected to a precision voltage
reference through a resistor. Most controllers have a switch to remove that
internal connection.
Voltage – value will be equal to DC voltage at input connection or be based

on settings defined on the Conversions page.
Digital - used for monitoring a contact closure. When the contact is open, the
input will measure the voltage reference and the input value will be off. When
the contact is closed, the input is shorted to ground and the value of the input
will be on.
Counter – used for accumulating contact closures typically interfacing to a

metering device (KW meter or flow meter). Count is accumulated on the
falling edge (off to on, open to closed)
ACCTemp(DegF) – The selection for interfacing to a 10K type II thermistor.

The Controller has a built in lookup table for converting voltage measurement
to a corresponding temperature value.

Settings Page
ElecType: cont…
ACCTemp(DegC) – The selection for interfacing to a 10K type II thermistor.

The Controller has a built in lookup table for converting voltage measurement
to a corresponding temperature value.
Supervised – Used for monitoring both a contact closure and the condition of
the wiring. Not available on all controllers. Resistor type setting defines the
wiring circuit monitored.
ACCAirflow – only available for certain models of Infinet Controllers that

have an on-board airflow sensor. Value of input is in inches of water column.
Other – There are numerous other selections that are only available on
CX9400 32-16 UI Input card.
Invert:
When checked, the value for a digital input will be reversed as follows:
- When the contact is open, the input will measure the voltage reference and
the input value will be on.
- When the contact is closed, the input is shorted to ground and the value of
the input will be off.
Channel:
The channel defines the physical connection to the controller. Input connections
on the controller are clearly marked by channel number.
IOU:
Enter an IOU number for the following three types on controllers:
CX9200 - Enter the number of the IOU board on Lbus.
CX9400 - Enter the slot number where the IO card is plugged into the card
rack.
NetController - Enter the number of the IO module that is sending the input.
This setting is grayed out when configuring inputs at the Infinet Controllers.

Format:
Format configures the display of the Value attribute.
Example Definition
Default format (The number of pound signs will equal the amount
###.###
of characters displayed and can be adjusted)
$### Displays a digital point as (On or Off)
Displays an analog points value in percentage. (Usually used with

###.#%
engineering value of 0 to 1)
Removes trailing zeroes (For example, 72.00 degrees would

###.#}
display as 72.)
Digital Filter:
Enables or disables the digital filter.
When the Digital Filter is True, value updates are slightly delayed in order to
filter out sudden, radical changes in sensor readings. True – averaged
When the Digital Filter is False, the value is updated without delay. This provides
slightly faster updates. False – instantaneous (not available on all controllers)
Resistor Type:
The drop down menu offers a variety of resister circuits to choose from for
supervised inputs.
The following resister types are defined in more detail in the security inputs and
outputs chapter.
- NO Series
- NC Series
- NO Parallel
- NC Parallel
- NO Series Parallel
- NC Series Parallel

Conversions Page
The Conversions page, converts sensor readings (ElecType from the Settings page)
into engineering units.
Input signals are converted to temperatures, relative humidity and atmospheric

pressure.
Threshold:
Enter the amount of change in engineering units that must occur before the point
updates other objects such as programs, functions, alarms, reports, and exports to
other controllers.
A threshold of zero (0) indicated no threshold and increases network traffic, as all
associated objects update with any change in point value.
Increasing threshold can reduce network traffic for exported points.

Conversions Page cont…
Conversions:
Enter a conversion formula into the Conversion field if you need to convert
electrical units into engineering units.
Enter a formula for either of the two following circumstances:
- The conversion between the sensor reading ElecType and engineering units
is non-linear.
- To limit or bias a linear conversion.
Use the ElecValue attribute in the conversion statement.
ElecValue is the value of the point in the units of the ElecType prior to the
conversion. If there is no conversion (or invert) then Value is equal to ElecValue.
Example:
Sqrt(elecvalue)* 800 - used for converting velocity pressure to CFM where

800 is the Kfactor ( CFM @ 1‖ velocity pressure) for the VAV box
Auto Conversion:
Enter values for the top of scale and bottom of scale for the units specified in the
General page, as well as the ElecType specified in the Settings page:
Engineering Units
In the Top left field, enter the top of scale for the engineering units.
In the Bottom left field, enter the bottom of scale for the engineering units.
Voltage
In the Top right field, enter the top of scale for the electrical units.
In the Bottom right field, enter the bottom of scale for the electrical units.
Formulas entered in the Conversion field take precedence over the conversion
generated by the Auto Conversion. The Auto Conversion recognizes a limiting or
biasing formula and uses it in its conversion.

Logs Page
A log is a record of point values stored in a structure from which you can print or
retrieve them. The structure, also known as an array, looks like a single column table
and contains the recorded values.
Two types of logs can be defined for a point:
Logs - A short-term record stored within the controller that owns the point
Extended Logs - A long-term record stored in the database. Values for the
extended log are retrieved from the controller log via a Plain English program.
Log-Types
Log values are viewable through the Group History, Graph Viewer and through a
Report Program.

Logs Page cont…
Logs
Number of Entries:
The maximum number of entries allowed in a log depends on the memory
available on your controller.
Type:
Select one of the following log types:
 Manual
 LogInstantaneous
Continuum stores the current value of objects at the beginning of every
interval.
 LogAverage
Continuum calculates average object values over every interval, using a
weighted average algorithm. Average values are stored at the end of every
interval.
 LogMaximum
Continuum compares all values over an interval, and finds the maximum
value. Maximum values are stored at the end of every interval.
 LogMinimum
Continuum compares all values over an interval and finds the minimum
value. Minimum values are stored at the end of every interval.
Interval:
Interval is set if the log is not manual.
This determines how often Continuum will store new values in the log. The
values entered for days, hours, minutes, and seconds are combined to create the
total interval. The extended log interval must be a multiple of the short-term log
interval.
- Days - Hours
- Minutes - Seconds
In order to have a log updated at the same time every hour, the total interval must
be evenly divisible into one hour.

Logs Page
Extended Logs
Number of Entries:
The maximum number of entries is 65,535.
Interval:
If the log is not manual, set the interval.
values that you enter for days, hours, minutes, and seconds are combined to create
the total interval.
- Days - Hours
- Minutes - Seconds
Automatic Logs Vs. Manual Logs
Automatic Logs:
Automatic logs entries are recorded by Continuum at specific intervals that you
define. Continuum updates automatic logs by inserting new values into the first
log entry. For every interval, a new value is stored in the first log entry, pushing
existing values down to the remaining entries. When the specified number of
entries is full of values, the bottom value is ―dropped off‖ when a new value is
inserted.
When working with logs, point names and index numbers are used to retrieve
values stored in logs. This is achieved by enclosing the index number in square
brackets [ ] directly after the point alias. For example, to print the sixth entry (72)
of the log for "SupplyAir," use the following command:
PRINT SupplyAir[6]
Manual Logs:
Unlike automatic logs, Continuum does not set manual log entries. Manual log
entries are set either from the Command Line Editor, a report, or a Plain English
program. To update a manual log, enclose the index number in square brackets [ ]
directly after the point alias. The example below sets the third log entry of an
array named MyNum:
SET MyNum[3] TO 12

Alarms Page:
Alarms are covered later in this manual.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The following Editor pages are not covered in this course:
Triggers Page:
Triggers are covered in the Plain English course.
Security Level Page:

Security levels are covered in the System Administration course.
Xdrivers Page:
Refer to the Xdriver documentation for the specific requirements of the driver that
you are using.

Technical Information for Inputs
 Input Types
 Universal Inputs
 Temperature Inputs
 Verifying Sensors are Correct
 Wire Gauge Vs Distance
 Connection Types
 Digital Inputs
 Counter Inputs
 Voltage Inputs
 2, 3 & 4 Wire Voltage Interface
 Voltage Divider
 Current Inputs
 Supervised Inputs
 Input Troubleshooting

Input Types
There are basically two types of input circuits available throughout the Infinity
controller line.
 Universal Inputs
 Digital Inputs

Universal Inputs
Infinity Universal inputs are essentially voltmeters. The value of the ElecType
attribute tells the controller how to interpret the reading. Universal inputs can be
configured through software to become one of five different input circuits:
 Temperature
 Voltage
 Digital
 Counter
 Supervised
Each Universal input is read every 100 milliseconds. This reading is independent of
the controller scan time.
The following is a simplified schematic of the Continuum Universal input:
Vref 5.12 V
Rref 10K Ω
Swdis
In
Ret
The main differences between the different controllers are the values of the pull-up
resistor (Rref), the reference voltage (Vref) value and the existence of a pull-up
disable switch (Swdis).

Universal Inputs
The table below lists values by product. There is a low-pass filter for each input
formed by the series resistor (Rseries) and the filter capacitor (C). The series resistor
is utilized for over voltage protection in limiting current to the two protection diodes.
Note also that all input returns are combined and directly connected to earth ground.
It is possible to have more than one input share a single return wire. Keep in mind
that the current through each input is approximately 0.5mA, so voltage drops occur
with long runs of small gauge wire.
Counter Max.
Product Vref Rref Switch
Freq. (Hz)
CX 9900 10.0 V 30.1 K YES 5

CX 9400 10.0 V 30.1 K YES 5
CX 9500 10.0 V 30.1 K YES 4
SCX 900 10.0 V 30.1 K YES 4
LCX 810 10.0 V 30.1 K YES 4
LCX 800 5.12 V 10.0 K NO 4
TCX840 5.12 V 10.0 K NO 4
TCX850 5.12 V 10.0 K NO 4
TCX865 5.12 V 10.0 K NO 4
TCX870 5.12 V 10.0 K NO 4
ACX 700 10.0 V 30.1 K NO None
ACX 780/781 10.0 V 30.1 K NO None
IOUs 8.19 V 30.1 K NO 10
UI-8-10 10.0 K
5.12/10 V YES 4/10 K
(5.12 V)
i2 Controllers
i2 920 10.0 V 30.1 K Yes 4

I2 800 5.12 V 10.0 K Yes 4
I2 810 10.0 V 30.1 K Yes 4
I2 600 5.12 V 10.0 K Yes 4
I2 865 / 866 5.12 V 10.0 K Yes 4
I2 867 5.12 V 10.0 K Yes 4
I2 885 5.12 V 10.0 K Yes 4
I2 850 5.12 V 10.0 K Yes 4
I2 887 5.12 V 10.0 K Yes 4

Temperature Inputs
The Temperature input type allows you to directly connect a thermistor or other
temperature sensor to the input.
Vref 5.12 V
Rref 10K Ω
2.56
Volts DC
Sw
In
Rth 10K Ω
Ret
Temperature inputs work by forming a voltage divider with Vref, Rref, and the
thermistor. For products with a pull-up disable switch, the pull-up resistor must be
enabled. When the input point is configured as a temperature input, the controller
utilizes a look-up table to convert from a voltage reading to a temperature reading in
degrees Fahrenheit or Celsius.
The table on the next page is a chart of resistance versus temperature for the Precon
Type III 10K thermistor. To calculate the appropriate voltage reading across the
universal input, use the following formula:
Vinput = Vref * (Rth / (Rth + Rref ))
Rth is the resistance of the thermistor from the table. Vref and Rref are from the
previous table.

Resistance vs Temperature for Precon Type III 10K Thermistor
R F R F R F R F R F
173631. -30 39343.9 21 11194.2 72 3819.13 123 1508.2 174
168222. -29 38308.7 22 10943. 73 3745.29 124 1482.86 175
162998. -28 37304. 23 10698.1 74 3673.09 125 1458. 176
157954. -27 36328.8 24 10459.4 75 3602.47 126 1433.63 177
153083. -26 35382.1 25 10226.8 76 3533.41 127 1409.72 178
148378. -25 34463. 26 10000. 77 3465.86 128 1386.28 179
143833. -24 33570.7 27 9778.91 78 3399.79 129 1363.29, 180
139442. -23 32704.2 28 9563.35 79 3335.17 130 1340.74 181
135200. -22 31862.8 29 9353.18 80 3271.95 131 1318.62 182
131101. -21 310457 30 9148.24 81 3210.1 132 1296.92 183
127139. -20 30252. 31 8948.38 82 3149.59 133 1275.64 184
123310. -19 29481.1 32 8753.48 83 3090.38 134 1254.76 185
119609. -18 28732.2 33 8563.39 84 3032.46 135 1234.28 186
116031. -17 28004.6 34 8377.98 85 2975.77 136 1214.18 187
112571. -16 27297.7 35 8197.12 86 2920.3 137 1194.46 188
109226. -15 26610.8 36 8020.69 87 2866.02 138 1175.12 189
105992. -14 25943.4 37 7848.56 88 2812.89 139 1156.14 190
102863. -13 25294.7 38 7680.64 89 2760.9 140 1137.51 191
99837.3 -12 24664.2 39 7516.78 90 2710. 141 1119.23 192
96910.2 -11 24051.4 40 7356.9 91 2660.18 142 1101.29 193
94078.4 -l0 23455.6 41 7200.88 92 2611.42 143 1083.68 194
91338.6 -9 22876.5 42 7048.62 93 2563.68 144 1066.4 195
88687.3 -8 22313.4 43 6900.01 94 2516.94 145 1049.44 196
86121.6 -7 21765.9 44 6754.96 95 2471.18 146 1032.8 197
83638.4 -6 21233.5 45 6613.38 96 2426.37 147 1016.46 198
81234.8 -5 20715.7 46 6475.18 97 2382.5 148 1000.42 199
78908. -4 20212.2 47 6340.25 98 2339.54 149 984.671 200
76655.3 -3 19722.4 48 6208.53 99 2297.47 150 969.213 201
74474.2 -2 19245.9 49 6079.91 100 2256.28 151 954.036 202
72362.1 -1 18782.4 50 5954.33 101 2215.93 152 939.136 203
70316.7 0 18331.5 51 5831.7 102 2176.41 153 924.506 204
68335.6 1 17892.8 52 5711.95 103 2137.7 154 910.141 205
66416.7 2 17465.9 53 5594.99 104 2099.78 155 896.036 206
64557.9 3 17050.4 54 5480.76 105 2062.64 156 882.184 207
62756.9 4 16646.1 55 5369.19 106 2026.25 157 868.582 208
61012. 5 16252.6 56 5260.2 107 1990.6 158 855.224 209
59321.1 6 15869.6 57 5153.74 108 1955.67 159 842.104 210
57682.4 7 15496.8 58 5049.73 109 1921.45 160 829.219 211
56094.3 8 15133.8 59 4948.11 110 1887.92 161 816.563 212
54554.9 9 14780.4 60 4848.82 111 1855.07 162 804.133 213
53062.6 10 14436.4 61 4751.81 112 1822.87 163 791.922 214
51615.9 11 14101.3 62 4657.01 113 1791.32 164 779.928 215
50213.1 12 13775.1 63 4564.37 114 1760.39 165 768.145 216
48853. 13 13457.3 64 4473.83 115 1730.09 166 756.569 217
47533.9 14 13147.9 65 4385.34 116 1700.38 167 745.197 218
46254.7 15 12846.4 66 4298.85 117 1671.26 168 734.024 219
45013.9 16 12552.8 67 4214.3 118 1642.72 169 723.047 220
43810.3 17 12266.8 68 4131.66 119 1614.74 170 712.26 221
42642.6 18 11988.1 69 4050.86 120 1587.31 171 701.662 222
41509.8 19 11716.6 70 3971.87 121 1560.42 172 691.247 223
40410.5 20 11452. 71 3894.64 122 1534.05 173 681.013 224

Verifying Sensors are Correct
If a temperature reading is incorrect for what the temperature in the space is, you have
to determine whether the problem is the:
 Controller
 Wiring
 Thermistor
Step 1
 At the controller, lift the connection to the Input, leaving the return connected,
and ohm out the thermistor including the wire-run to the thermistor.
 Compare the resistance to temperature using the chart (pg7)
Controller
Vref 5.12 V
10K Rref 10K Ω

Ohms
Sw
In
Thermistor
10K Ω
Ret

Verifying Sensors are Correct
Step 2
 Go directly to the sensor (thermistor) and ohm it out to see if you get the same
resistance measurement as step 1.
Controller
Vref 5.12 V
10K Rref 10K Ω

Ohms
Sw
In
Thermistor
10K Ω
Ret
A Different Resistance value indicates additional resistance in the circuit.
Most likely the problem is that you have to long of run of to small gauge of wire.

Wire Gauge Vs Distance Chart
Power Cable Resistance
Wire gauge (AWG) Resistance (Ohms per 1000 feet)
10 1.0
12 1.7
14 2.6
16 4.2
18 6.6
20 10.5
22 16.8
24 27.3

Connection Types
Another issue that can lead to a significant change in resistance is a poor connection
between the thermistor and the wire going back to the controller.
Gas-tight Connections:
A Gas-tight connection is the ideal type of connection to use because no oxidation

will build up over time between the two conductors.
 Screw Terminal Type: The preferred type to use
 Soldered Type: Creates servicing issues
 Crimp Type: Use one that provides a solid connection between conductors.
Strip back about one inch (1‖), twist them together, fold it back and then
crimp on that.
Issues with Wire-nuts:
This is the worst type of connection and should not be used.
By disconnecting the connection for testing purposes, and then re-connecting, will
temporarily resolve the problem. Don’t be fooled because the problem will come
back.
Note: It costs very little to make solid connections at install time. It costs a
significant amount of money to fix the problem/s later.
Andover Continuum’s Sensor type:

Type 3 10k Thermistor
Our circuit is optimized and there is a look-up table for this type of sensor. It is
possible to use other sensor types, but you will have to provide a conversion / look-up
table for implementing this.

Digital Inputs
Digital input points are designed to allow the monitoring of contact closures across an
input (contact wired between the input and return). When monitoring a contact
closure, the pull-up resistor must be enabled.
Vref 5.12 V
Rref 10K Ω
5.0
Volts DC
Sw
Switch In
Ret
A digital input is considered ―ON‖ whenever the voltage across its input meets or
exceeds the ON Threshold. For a contact closure, this is 0 volts. Similarly, an OFF
condition meets or is lower than the Off Threshold. With a contact closure, this is
Vref. On and Off threshold values are included in the table at the beginning of this
chapter.
Note: There is a Invert attribute when configuring a point. If this attribute is

enabled, readings are reversed: On when the input is at Vref because the contact is
open, and Off when the input is at 0 volts because the contact is closed.

Counter Inputs
Counter inputs are designed to allow the monitoring of contact closures across an
input just like digital inputs, but they accumulate a total of those closures and act like
a counter.
Interfacing is similar to a digital input, but you must take into account the frequency
of the input signal being counted. Universal inputs do not allow for very high speed
contact counting.
Counter Duty Cycle

To achieve the maximum counter frequency, the duty cycle must be 50%. That is, the
input is On half the time and Off the other half. This is also called a 50/50 duty cycle.
For example, for an input with a 4-hertz frequency, On and Off times must be at least
125 milliseconds.
Vref Vref
Rref Rref
5.0 0.0
Volts DC Volts DC
Sw Sw
Switch Switch
Count+1
5 Volts
125 mS
125 mS
0 Volts

Voltage Inputs
When interfacing to a voltage output device, specific information on the transducer
may be required. The pull-up resistor of the input circuit will affect the output of the
transducer. On a SCX 900 or a LCX 810, switch out the pull-up resistor. On other
controllers, it is necessary to know the source resistance (Rs) of the transducer and to
use the following conversion equation:
(ElecValue - (Vref * Rs / (Rs + Rref)) / (Rref / (Rs + Rref)))
Example:
To solve for a TCX 850 voltage input with a transducer having a source resistance of
100 ohms:
Vref = 5.12 V
Rref = 10K ohms
Rs = 100 ohms
(ElecValue - (5.12*100 / (100+10000))/(10000/(100+10000)))
So:
(ElecValue - 0.051)/0.990
This conversion just gets the correct reading from the transducer. It does not convert
to your engineering type.

2-Wire Voltage Interface
The following figure illustrates a 2-wire, current measuring transducer with 0 to 5
volts DC output:
Vref 5.12 V
Rref 10K Ω
2.0
Volts DC
Transducer
(Current to Voltage) Sw
In
+
FanStatus -
Ret
Amps Voltage
15 5
0 0
Many voltage output transducers do not operate correctly with a pull-up resistor in the
circuit due to their high source resistance. When connected to the input of the
controller, there will be a "dead band" at the low end. The input at the controller will
always read at least 0.7 Volts.

For the 3-wire Voltage interface, the ground connection for power needs to be at the
transformer.
Vref 5.12 V
Power Supply
Rref 10K Ω
2.5
Volts DC
+V
Transducer Sw
In
G Ret
Connection to Return is Redundant
% open Voltage
100 5
0 0

Vref 5.12 V
Power Supply
Rref 10K Ω
Transducer 2.5
Volts DC
+V
Sw
-V
In
+S
-S
Ret
Make connection if transducer

signal is not ground referenced
Inch/ H2O Voltage

1 5
0 0

Voltage Dividers
There are instances where it is necessary to interface to a voltage source that is higher
than the input range of the controller.
DC Input Voltage Divider

Resistor values set up a ratio of voltage drop.
Resistors must be sized appropriately for the source being monitored.
The higher the resistance values, the less loading effect there will be on the
source. The lower the resistance values, the less effect the pull-up resistor will
have on the reading.
Vref 5.12 V
Rref 10K Ω
4.0
Volts DC
24 VDC Sw
5K Ω In
1K Ω
Ret
The equation for this circuit is:
Vinput = Vsource * ( Rinput / ( Rinput + Rseries )
Where Vinput is ElecValue
For example, solve for Vsource on a TCX 850, with Rseries=5K and Rinput=1K:
Changing around the previous equation to find Vsource:
Vsource = Vinput * (Rinput + Rsource) / Rinput
Substituting values:
Vsource = ElecValue * (1K + 5K) / 1K = ElecValue * 6

Current Input
To sense current from a Universal Input, you must wire a resistor across the input.
Vref 5.12 V
Power
Supply
Rref 10K Ω
+ - 3.0
Volts DC
Sw
In
Loop
250 Ω
Powered
Device
Ret
Connection to Return
is Redundant
Make sure the pull-up resistor is out of the circuit. The exact value of the sensor
resistance required varies based on the range of current—while we recommend 250
for a 0 to 20 mA input, you can calculate the appropriate resistance with the following
formula:
Input Current = Voltage Reading / Rshunt
For 20 mA (the maximum current), the input voltage read is approximately 5 V if you
have a sensor resistance of 250 . The input voltage must be between 0 and 5.115 V.
Note: The accuracy of the input is directly proportional to the tolerance of the
resistor. So the lower the tolerance, the greater the accuracy. The wattage rating
should be greater than or equal to 0.25 watts.

Input Troubleshooting
When the reading of an Input through the user interface is not correct, we must
identify the cause of that reading.
Some possibilities are:
 The device we are connecting to is not functioning correctly (it failed or is out
of calibration)
 The device is not installed correctly (power, physical location, or mechanical)
 Wiring fault
 Signal adversely affected by the connection to the Infinity input
 Software configuration problem
 A hardware problem

Troubleshooting Sequence
1. Always start your troubleshooting by making a DC voltage measurement directly
at the input. For a voltage input, compare that reading to the point’s ElecValue
attribute. If the readings are the same, then you know that the Input is being read
correctly.
2. Next, you must verify whether or not that is the correct electrical signal for the
device to be output for that device’s stimulus (PSI, %RH, ―H2O, CO2 PPM, or
Drive Speed). If the electrical signal is correct, then the problem is with the
conversion.
3. When the electrical signal out of the device is not correct, the next step is to
disconnect the wiring from the input and measure the voltage reading across the
wires. If the reading changed after being disconnected from the controller then
that device is affected by either the pull-up resistor of the input or by being
ground referenced. Connect only the ground wire and measure the voltage reading
again, identifying if the ground connection is causing the problem. If it’s the
ground connection then you are interfacing with a device that is incompatible with
single-ended or ground referenced inputs. You will need an isolation module (or
possibly an isolated power supply to power the device) to solve the problem.
For a temperature input, disconnect the wiring to the input and ohm out the wires.
Verify the measurement against the resistance to temperature chart. Also measure
the resistance directly at the thermistor to make sure the reading did not change. If
it did change, then there is significant resistance in the wiring which will affect
the reading.
4. When the controller no longer considers the input readings to be valid, it puts the
ElecValue to 999.9 on all inputs. Each controller has two additional inputs that
are internal to the input circuitry. One is hard wired to the reference channel and
the other is connected to ground. These two inputs are used for continuous
software calibration of the input circuit. If at any time either of these two inputs
reads out of a predefined range, then the input routine will set the ElecValue of
all inputs to 999.9. Any input has a voltage of greater than the Vref voltage
((1.414 * AC measurement) + DC measurement). This overvoltage is often
caused by either a failure in the transducer or the transducer’s input range being
exceeded. For example, a 0-1‖ static pressure transducer with 1.5‖ into it. Input
voltage transients can also cause this.

InfinityOutput
An InfinityOutput is a connection to an Infinity or Infinet controller that controls a
particular device.
Outputs can control devices like fans, dampers, solenoids, heaters, chillers, etc…
Outputs send signals to controlled devices that are:
- Digital ((On / Off) Contact Closures)
- Analog (Voltage or Current)
- Air Pressure
Creating an InfinityOutput
1. Right click on the controller to which you want to add an InfinityOutput and from
the drop down menu, select; New / InfinityOutput.
2. Enter the Object Name for the InfinityOutput point and select Create.

The InfinityOutput Editor
The InfinityOutput Editor contains several pages for configuring an Output point.
Attributes that you set include Value, Units, Description, Format, ElecType and
Channnel. (IOU if at CX/NetController)
General Page
Value:
When a point is enabled and active, the control system updates the value
automatically. The value reflects the current or last commanded value to this
point.
Units:
Examples:
 On/Off
 % Open

Description:
Refer to the InfinityInput General page.
State:
When an Output is enabled, its value can be affected by a program, a schedule or
an operator command.
When an output is disabled, its value cannot be affected by a program or schedule

but can be affected by an operator command.
Exported:
Alarms:

Settings Page
Elec-Type
ElecType:
The ElecType defines how the controller will change or update the value of the
output being controlled.
 Voltage – Voltage Outputs are ground referenced signals with a range of

0-10VDC.
 Digital – The output is an on/off contact closure.
 Current – Output is a current sourcing, ground referenced circuit. This

output can source 0-20ma with a maximum impedance of 750Ω.
 TriState – Adjacent pairs of Form C relays can be combined at any one

time to form a standard TriState output.
There are additional application / controller specific ElecTypes available.
Invert:
Inverts the meanings of On and Off and is used only with Digital as an ElecType.
Channel:
The channel defines the physical connection to the controller. Output connections

IOU:
Use the up and down selection arrows to enter an IOU number for the following
three types on controllers:
rack.
NetController - Enter the number of the IO module that is controlling the

output.
This setting is grayed out when configuring outputs at the Infinet Controllers.
Format:
Refer to the InfinityInput Settings page.

Conversions Page
The Conversions page, converts electrical values such as (0V - 10V) into engineering
values (% Open).
Output electrical signals are converted to an engineering value for equipment control
such as valves and actuators.
Conversion:
Refer to the InfinityInput Conversions page.
Auto Conversion:
Refer to the InfinityInput Conversions page.

Logs Page
Refer to the InfinityInput Logs page.

Technical Information for Outputs
 Relays
 Triacs
 Digital Output Forms
 TriState Outputs
 Voltage Outputs
 Current Outputs

Digital Outputs
Digital outputs are Relays and Triacs.
Relays
The relay is the most familiar type of output circuit. It is used in all older
controllers. The relay consists of an electromagnetic coil and a set of contacts. It
acts like an automatic switch.
Controller
RELAY
C
MOV
NC
NO A metal oxide varistor (MOV)

placed directly across the coil of
the device being switched
Infinity relay outputs consist of bare contacts. To protect the controller when
switching inductive loads with relay outputs, place a metal oxide varistor (MOV)
directly across the coil of the device being switched. When that coil is de-
energized, a very high voltage transient is generated. The amplitude of the
transient can be anywhere from hundreds to thousands of volts. The transient will
not cause any physical damage, but may lead to reset, memory loss, or hard fail.
Triacs
Triacs are extremely reliable and have built-in MOVs to prevent reflected spikes
from entering the unit. There are limitations to Triacs, the biggest being that they
cannot switch DC loads. Another is that in order for the Triac requires a minimum
current to switch. Therefore, it isn’t a direct replacement for a contact closure. A
Triac require at lease 30 mA of load current for the Triac to switch.
Resistor
If the inductive load draws

less than 30 mA, a resistor
needs to be placed in series.
Gate

Digital Output Forms
Digital outputs come in a variety of form types. The most common are the Form A,
Form C and TriState output configurations.
Form A
NO
Form C
NC
NO
Tri-State
(TCX 850 Configuration)
Relay 1
NO
Relay 2
+ On
- On
NO

Tri-State Output
Adjacent pairs of Relay or Triac Outputs can be combined to form a Tri-state output:
 OUT1 and OUT2
 OUT3 and OUT4
Configure the output point of the first point (OUT1 or OUT3) with an Electrical Type
of Tri-state.
Caution: Do not attempt to use OUT2 and OUT3 as a tri-state pair. An error message
may result. Configure tri-state outputs as OUT1-OUT2 or OUT3-OUT4.
When Output 1 is configured as Tri-State, Output 2 cannot be configured.
Connect the two outputs together as follows:
Tri-State Transformer
(External Configuration)
Relay 1
C
NC
+ On
NO
Relay 2
C
Off
NC
- On
NO

Voltage Outputs
The voltage output is a ground referenced signal with a range of 0 - 20VDC. Some
controllers allow only 0-10VDC. The maximum output current is 5mA (4000 ohms
minimum resistance). Some controllers place a fuse in series with the voltage
connection, but not with the ground. Ensure that the device being connected is either
floating or at the same ground potential as the controller.
When using a Belimo actuator (or any other 3 wire AC powered device), be sure that
the common connection is connected to earth ground.
Fuse V
Device > 2K Ω
GND
Not required if powered device

is ground referenced
Fuse V Many devices can be in parallel
Device 1 Device 2 Device 3
GND
High Impedance
(~1M Ω)

Voltage Outputs
If an over-voltage is applied to a voltage connection with no fuse protection, the
controller will be physically damaged.
Fuse Protection on
No Fuse Protection
Voltage Output
i2 920 i2 804
i2 814 i2 866
i2 867
Current Outputs
The current output is a current sourcing, ground referenced circuit. This output can
source 0 - 20 mA with a maximum load impedance of 750 ohms. As with the voltage
output, on some controllers only the current connection is fused, so ensure that the
end device is either floating or referenced to the same ground as the controller.
There is a fuse in series with the voltage connection, but not with the ground. Ensure
that the device being connected to is either floating or at the same ground potential as
the controller.
Fuse I
Device > 750 Ω
GND


Ch 9 Security
Input / Output
Points
Chapter Contents
 Security Inputs & Outputs
 Security Input
 Creating a Supervised InfinityInput
 The InfinityInput Editor
 SecurityOutput
 Creating a Digital InfinityOutput
 The InfinityOutput Editor
 Relays
9-2 Security Input & Output Points

Security Inputs & Outputs
The primary focus within a security system is the creation of Supervised
InfinityInputs and Digital InfinityOutputs.
There can be many different configurations of points within a Continuum system and
are covered in the Infinity Inputs & Outputs chapter.
Security Input
An InfinityInput for security is configured as a Supervised point. A Supervised point
is able to monitor a contact along with the condition of the wiring and display a
troubled condition if a wiring problem is detected. Security applications utilize this
configuration in the case that someone tampers with the wires.
Creating a Supervised InfinityInput

1. Right click on the appropriate controller for the InfinityInput and from the drop
down menu, select; New / InfinityInput.
2. Enter the Object Name for the InfinityInput point and select Create.

General Page
Value:
The value of an InfintyInput is automatically updated by the system based on
what is physically connected to the input and how the input is configured.
Units:
When configuring a Supervised point, it is a good idea to define the On value.
Examples:
 On = Open
 On = Motion

Description:
The description can be up to 32 characters including spaces. The description is
often used to customize alarm messages with specific information for this point.
Example: First Floor hallway
State:
When an input is enabled, its value is automatically updated by the system. A
disabled input’s value will not be automatically updated. A disabled input can
have its value manually set and it will hold that value. Once the input is enabled,
the system will automatically update the value upon the next change of signal on
the input.
Exported:
configured for this point or this point is referenced in a program in another
controller.
Alarms:

Settings Page
ElecType:
The ElecType defines how the controller will interpret the DC voltage measured
at the input connection. The input is internally connected to a precision voltage
reference through a resistor. Most controllers have a switch to remove that
internal connection.
Supervised – Used for monitoring both a contact closure and the condition of
the wiring. Not available on all controllers. Resistor type setting defines the
wiring circuit monitored.
Invert:
Not selectable in a Supervised configuration.
Channel:
The channel defines the physical connection to the controller. Input connections

IOU:
CX9400 - Enter the slot number where the IO card is plugged into.
NetController - Enter the number of the IO module that is sending the input.
Assign the appropriate number for the module you are configuring.
This setting is grayed out when configuring inputs at the Infinet Controllers.
Format:
Example Definition
$####### Displays a Supervised point as: On, Off or Trouble
The 7 pound signs (#) resemble each character for the word Trouble. One sign per
character. Set the amount of pound signs to the longest value to be displayed.
The leading dollar sign ($) means display text.

Digital Filter:
Not settable in a Supervised configuration.
Resistor Type:
The drop down menu offers a variety of resister types to choose from.
The following resister types are defined in more detail on the next page.
- NO Series
- NC Series
- NO Parallel
- NC Parallel
- NO Series Parallel
- NC Series Parallel

Settings Page
Resistor Type: cont…
The following table summarizes the selections based upon switch configuration.
Circuit
Input Type Switch Type
Diagram
NOSeries Normally-open switch with a resistor in series.
Normally-closed switch with a resistor in

NCSeries
series.
Normally-open switch with a resistor in

NOPar
parallel.

NCPar
parallel.
Normally-open switch with a resistor in parallel

NOSerPar
and an added resistor in series.

NCSerPar
parallel and an added resistor in series.

Settings Page
Resistor Type: cont…
The table below displays the value for each circuit condition
NCSeries
Sensor Circuit Condition Resistance Value
Closed Closed 10K Off
Open Open Infinite On
Shorted Zero Trouble
Wire Cut Infinite On
NOSeries
Closed Open Infinite Off
Open Closed 10K On
NCParallel
Closed Closed Zero Off
Open Open 10K On
Shorted Zero Off
Wire Cut Infinite Trouble
NOParallel
Closed Open 10K Off
Open Closed Zero On
Shorted Zero On
NCSerPar
Open Open 10K On
NOSerPar
Closed Open 10K Off
Open Closed 5K On

Supervised Inputs
Inputs may be connected as supervisory inputs. The following drawings depict the six
types of supervisory inputs that exist—three normally closed and three normally open
types. After the drawings, there is an explanation of which types are recommended
for access control installations.
Normally Closed (NC) Series

With this type of input wiring, a resistor is placed in series with the input. When
the door switch is closed (normal position) the door is assumed to be closed. The
circuit presents a reading of 10K ohms at the input.
Vref 5.12 V
Rref
10K Ω 2.56
Volts DC
Sw
NC Series
In
10K Ω
Ret
Circuit Condition Resistance Value

Closed 10K Off
Open Infinite On
When the door is opened the switch opens and an infinite resistance is measured.
If the wires to the door are cut it also appears as a ―door open‖ condition. In this
case there would be a door open without a valid card swipe or valid keypad entry
resulting in a ―door violation‖. Shorting the input causes a zero ohm resistance
which also results in a door violation.

Supervised Inputs
Normally Closed (NC) Parallel
With this type of input wiring, a resistor is placed in parallel (across) with the
input. When the door switch is closed (normal position) the door is assumed to be
closed. The circuit presents a reading of zero ohms resistance at the input.
Vref 5.12 V
Rref
10K Ω
0.0
Volts DC
Sw
NC Parallel
In
10K Ω
Ret

Closed Zero Off
Open 10K On
Shorted Zero Off
When the door is opened the switch opens and the external resistance is measured.
If the wires to the door are cut it appears as an infinite resistance resulting in a
door violation or error condition. Shorting the input causes it to look like a normal
―door closed‖ condition. In this case the door could be forced open and the system
would not detect the change in condition.

Supervised Inputs
Normally Closed (NC) Series Parallel
With this type of input wiring, two external resistors are added to the input, one in
series and the other in parallel. When the door switch is closed (normal position)
the door is assumed to be closed. The circuit presents a reading composed of both
resistances in parallel that works out to be half the value of one of them (5K).
Vref 5.12 V
Rref
10K Ω 1.7
Volts DC
Sw
NC Series Parallel
In
10K Ω
10K Ω
Ret

Closed 5K Off
Open 10K On
When the door is opened the switch opens and the value of the parallel resistor is
measured. If the wires to the door are cut it appears as an infinite resistance.
Shorting the input causes a zero ohm resistance. Both a short and an infinite
resistance (open) should result in an error condition.

Supervised Inputs
Normally Open (NO) Series
With this type of input wiring, a resistor is placed in series with the input. When
the door switch is open (normal position) the door is assumed to be closed. The
circuit presents a reading of 10K ohms at the input.
Vref 5.12 V
Rref
10K Ω 0.L
Volts DC
Sw
NO Series
In
10K Ω
Ret

Closed 10K On
Open Infinet Off
Wire Cut Infinite Off
When the door is opened the switch closes and the external resistance is
measured. Shorting the input causes a zero ohm reading which should result in an
error condition. Cutting the wire causes it to look like a normal ―door closed‖
condition. In this case the door could be forced open and the system would not
detect the change in condition.

Supervised Inputs
Normally Open (NO) Parallel
With this type of input wiring, a resistor is placed in parallel (across) with the
input. When the door switch is open (normal position) the door is assumed to be
closed. The circuit presents a reading of the external resistance at the input.
Vref 5.12 V
Rref
10K Ω
2.56
Volts DC
Sw
NO Parallel
In
10K Ω
Ret

Closed Zero On
Open 10K Off
Shorted Zero On
Wire Cut Infinite Infinet
When the door is opened the switch closes and a zero ohm resistance is measured.
If the wires to the door are cut it appears as an infinite resistance resulting in a
door violation or error condition. Shorting the input causes it to look like a normal
―door closed‖ condition. In this case the door could be forced open and the system
would not detect the change in condition.

Supervised Inputs
Normally Open (NO) Series Parallel
With this type of input wiring, two external resistors are added to the input, one in
series and the other in parallel. When the door switch is open (normal position)
the door is assumed to be closed. The circuit reads the value of the parallel
resistor.
Vref 5.12 V
Rref
10K Ω
2.56
Volts DC
Sw
NO Series Parallel
In
10K Ω
10K Ω
Ret

Closed 5K On
Open 10K Off
When the door is opened the switch closes and a reading results that is composed
of both resistances in parallel that works out to be half the value of one of them
(5K). If the wires to the door are cut it appears as an infinite resistance. Shorting
the input causes a zero ohm resistance. Both a short and an infinite resistance
(open) should result in an error condition.
Conversions Page
Conversions are not used in security applications.

Security Output
An InfinityOutput for security is configured as a Digital point. Security applications
focus on the control of switches and contacts. The value for a digital point is either
On or Off.
Creating a Digital InfinityOutput

1. Right click on the appropriate controller for the InfinityOutput and from the
drop down menu, select; New / InfinityOutput.
2. Enter the Object Name for the InfinityOutput point and select Create.

Settable attributes include Units, Description, State, ElecType, Channel and/or
IOU.
Set the Direction for points connected to Continuum display module.
The control system sets the other attributes.
General Page
Value:
When a point is enabled and active, the control system updates it automatically.
The value reflects the current or last commanded value to this point.
Units:
Example:
 On/Off

Description:
Enter up to 32 characters (including spaces) in the Description field to describe
the Infinity Output.
State:
Select either Enabled or Disabled from the dropdown menu. When the point is
enabled, the control system can change the point value from a program or report.
When the point is disabled, the control system cannot change the point value.
Exported:
controller.
Alarms:

Settings Page
ElecType:
Specifies the Electrical Type for the output point. Select the Digital option for
security applications
Invert:
Inverts the meanings of On and Off and is used only with the Digital ElecType.
When checked, the relay will be de-energized when value = On and energized
when value = Off.
Channel:
The channel defines the physical connection to the controller. Output connections

IOU:
rack.
NetController - Enter the number of the IO module that is controlling the

output.
This setting is grayed out when configuring outputs at the Infinet Controllers.
Format:
Refer to the InfinityInput Settings page.

Relays
The relay is the most familiar type of output circuit. It is used in all older
controllers. The relay consists of an electromagnetic coil and a set of contacts. It
acts like an automatic switch.
Controller
RELAY
C
MOV
NC
NO A metal oxide varistor (MOV)

placed directly across the coil of
the device being switched
Infinity relay outputs consist of bare contacts. To protect the controller when
switching inductive loads with relay outputs, place a metal oxide varistor (MOV)
directly across the coil of the device being switched. When that coil is de-
energized, a very high voltage transient is generated. The amplitude of the
transient can be anywhere from hundreds to thousands of volts. The transient will
not cause any physical damage, but may lead to reset, memory loss, or hard fail.

Ch 10 Infinity
Software
Points
Chapter Contents
 Infinity Software Points
 InfinityNumeric
 Creating an InfinityNumeric
 InfinityNumeric Editor
 InfinityDateTime
 Creating an InfinityDateTime
 InfinityDateTime Editor
 InfinityString
 Creating an InfinityString
 InfinityString Editor
10-2 Infinity Software Points

Infinity Software Points
Software points are variables within a controller.
There are 3 types of Software points:
- InfinityNumeric
- InfinityDateTime
- InfinityString
InfinityNumeric
An InfinityNumeric stores a number value (or on/off).
Uses include:
 System Constants – Set points, Maximum Occupancy count, Program Limit

values
 Result of calculation – Room Occupancy count, Runtime, Totalization
 On/Off values set by Schedule or program
Creating an InfinityNumeric
1. From Continuum Explorer, right-click on the controller that will store the numeric
and select New and then InfinityNumeric.
2. Enter an Object Name for the Numeric and select Create.

The InfinityNumeric Editor
General Page
Value:
Value can be set when the point is created or updated automatically by a schedule
or program or commanded by an operator.
Units:
Examples:
 Deg. F
 Cfm
 On/off
Description:
The description is often used to customize alarm messages with specific
information for this point. The description can be up to 32 characters including
spaces.

Channel / IOU / Direction:
Certain models of IOU Modules (Display, VT1, Video Switch) have their
functionality directly affected by software points that are mapped to that modules
IOU number. Refer to the IOU module documentation for specific requirements
of the IOU module that is being used.
State:
When a point is enabled, its value can be automatically updated by a program or a
schedule. A disabled points value will not be automatically updated. A disabled
point can have its value manually set and it will hold that value. Once a point is
enabled, the system can automatically update the value based upon the next
schedule or program change.
Setpoint:
When selected, the value of the point is stored in the database as well as in the
controller. When unchecked, it is only stored in the controller and the value in the
database will be not set.
Format:
Example Definition
Default format (The number of pound signs will equal the

###.###
amount of characters displayed and can be adjusted)
$### Displays a digital point as (On or Off)
Displays an analog points value in percentage. (Usually used with

###.#%
engineering value of 0 to 1)
Removes trailing zeroes (For example, 72.00 degrees would

###.#}
display as 72.)

Exported:
Exported is a read only attribute that is set automatically when an alarm is
controller.
Alarms:

Logs Page
A log is a record of point values stored in a structure from that can be printed or
retrieved. The structure, also known as an array, looks like a single column table and
contains the recorded values.
Two types of logs can be defined for a point:
Logs - A short-term record stored within the controller that owns the point
Extended Logs - A long-term record stored in the database. Values for the
extended log are retrieved from the controller log via a Plain English program.

Logs Page cont…
Logs
Number of Entries:
The maximum number of entries allowed in a log depends on the memory
available on your controller.
Type:
Select one of the following log types:
 Manual
 LogInstaneous
Continuum stores the current value of objects at the beginning of every
interval.
 LogAverage
Continuum calculates average object values over every interval, using a
weighted average algorithm. Average values are stored at the end of every
interval.
 LogMaximum
Continuum compares all values over an interval, and finds the maximum
value. Maximum values are stored at the end of every interval.
 LogMinimum
Continuum compares all values over an interval, and finds the minimum
value. Minimum values are stored at the end of every interval.
Interval:
Interval is set if the log is not manual.
total interval. The extended log interval must be a multiple of the short-term log
interval.
- Days - Hours
- Minutes - Seconds
In order to have a log updated at the same time every hour, the total interval must
be evenly divisible into one hour.
An interval setting of zero (0) will record a new entry anytime the value of the
point changes.

Logs Page
Extended Logs cont…
Interval:
If the log is not manual, set the interval.
total interval.
- Days - Hours
- Minutes - Seconds
Automatic Logs Vs. Manual Logs
Automatic Logs:
Automatic logs are generated by Continuum at specific defined intervals.
Continuum updates automatic logs by inserting new values into the first log entry.
For every interval, a new value is stored in the first log entry, pushing existing
values down to the remaining entries. When the specified number of entries is full
of values, the bottom value is “dropped off” when a new value is inserted.
When working with logs, point names and index numbers are used to retrieve
values stored in logs. To achieve this, enclose the index number in square
brackets [ ] directly after the point alias. For example, to print the fourth entry of
the log for TempSP, use the following command:
PRINT TempSP [4]
Manual Logs:
Unlike automatic logs, Continuum cannot set manual logs. Manual logs are set
either from the Command Line Editor, a report, or a Plain English program. To
update a manual log, enclose the index number in square brackets [ ] directly after
the point alias. The example below sets the third log entry of an array named
MyNum:
SET MyNum[3] TO 12
To perform calculations on logs, use the following Plain English keywords:
- Sum
- Average
- Minimum
- Maximum

InfinityDateTime
Infinity DateTime objects, which you create on an Infinity controller and Infinet
controller, store date and time information that is used in schedules and time stamps.
These points are temporary storage locations in the controller’s memory.
Creating an InfinityDateTime
1. From Continuum Explorer, right-click on the controller that will store the
DateTime and select New and then InfinityDateTime.
2. Type an Object Name for the DateTime and select Create.

The InfinityDateTime Editor
General Page
Value:
Enter a DateTime value or leave blank and allow a program or schedule to set the
value.
The initial value of a newly created point is displayed in this format:
01/01/1989 12:00:00 AM
Description:
The description can be up to 32 characters including spaces.
Channel:
Refer to the InfinityNumeric General page.

The InfinityDateTime Editor
IOU:
Direction:
State:
Setpoint:
Exported:
Logs Page
Refer to the InfinityNumerics Logs page.

InfinityString
An InfinityString object stores text messages that can include logical paths to physical
devices, such as printers or messages that are displayed to an operator when a set
point is reached.
Creating an InfinityString
1. From Continuum Explorer, right-click on the controller that will store the String
and select New and then InfinityString.
2. Type an Object Name for the String and select Create.

The InfinityString Editor
General Page
Value:
Enter a text value or leave blank and allow a program or schedule to set the value.
Description:
Refer to InfinityDateTime General page
String Size:
Enter a number for the number of characters.
The default size is 132 characters. To save memory, use a number that matches
the number of characters in the string. Do so by typing over the default number,
132, with a lower number.
By making the string size too short, the control system won’t accept characters
that exceed the size. For this reason, it is always a good idea to pad an estimated
size with a few extra spaces.
For Infinity i2 series controllers, the default string size is 32 characters.
Channel:

The InfinityString Editor
General Page
IOU:
Direction:
State:
Setpoint:
Logs Page
Refer to the InfinityNumeric Logs page.

Ch 11 Schedules
Chapter Contents
 What is a Schedule
 Opening a Schedule
 Schedule Features
 Editing a Schedule
 Creating a Schedule
 Configure a Schedule
 Downloading a Schedule to a Controller
11-2 Schedules
What is a Schedule
A schedule is a graphical calendar of events used to determine when:
 Equipment operates
 Processes occur
 Personnel have access to an area
 Doors are locked or unlocked
 Alarm conditions apply to devices such as motion sensors
Schedules are configured within Continuum to specify when events should occur
within a system. The events are performed automatically by Continuum at specified
times.
Schedules are based on two types of times:
 Occupied - When a building or area is occupied or should be occupied.
 Unoccupied - When a building or area is not occupied or should not be

occupied.
The default names for these times are On (occupied time) and Off (unoccupied time).
The Continuum Administrator defines these names when configuring schedules and
may rename them to better suit your application (for example, Unlocked and Locked
or Open and Closed).
As an Operator, you will be responsible for monitoring and modifying schedules.

This chapter provides information about schedule functions and how to use and make
changes to schedules.
Example of an Access Control Schedule

A Lobby Door schedule may be setup to specify the standard times when a facility’s
lobby door should be under card access control (locked) or not under card access
control (unlocked). If the standard unlocked hours were defined as Monday through
Friday, 7:00 AM to 6:00 PM, the lobby door would be locked prior to 7:00 AM and
after 6:00 PM, Monday through Friday. On weekends, the lobby door would be
locked 24 hours a day. During locked hours, personnel would need to use card access
to gain entry.
Example of an HVAC Control Schedule

An Air Conditioning schedule may be setup to specify the standard times when air
conditioning processes should be started and stopped. This schedule may specify the
standard times as 5:00 AM to 7:00 PM, Monday through Friday, for the months of
June, July, and August. The tasks required to air condition the building would occur
during the specified times and months and not occur at all other times.

Opening A Schedule
From Continuum's Main menu, select Schedules.
Continuum's Main Menu
Schedule Hot Spot
The schedule ListView page will be displayed.
Double click on a
schedule to open or
right click and select
open from the menu
11-4 Schedules
Schedule Features
When opening a schedule, the current yearly calendar will be displayed with days
highlighted in different colors depending on the attributes assigned to them.
Yearly View
Title Bar
The Title Bar displays the name and location of the schedule.
Warning: Pay attention to whether an asterisk (*) is displayed next to the

schedule name indicating the schedule is in edit-lock (a user will not be able to
save changes since the schedule is open elsewhere).

Schedule Features
Calendar Default Colors
Default Calendar colors for 4 specific types of days are predefined as follows:
 Light Blue – Default for standard weekdays
 Aqua (cyan) – Default for standard weekends
 Red – Default for user defined days and exception days
 Dark Blue – Default for the selected day
Red
(User Defined Days and
Exception Days)
Aqua Light Blue

(Standard (Standard
Weekends) Weekdays)
Dark Blue
(Selected Day)
Note: When creating a New Exception Day, the color is displayed in red and can’t be
edited.
11-6 Schedules
Schedule Features
Calendar Views
A Schedule displays yearly, weekly and daily calendar views, which are represented
by tabs. Select the tab to display a particular view.
Yearly View: The Yearly View displays all the days within the year. This is helpful
to see a global view of how the schedule is configured for the full year.
Yearly View
 To scroll through the years, click on the appropriate arrow at the top of the
schedule. The current year displays 2004.
Previous Year Next Year

2003 2005
 A single left click on a day will highlight that particular day in dark blue:

Schedule Features
Calendar Views
Yearly View
 Holding down the left mouse button and dragging the cursor over a range of
days will highlight those particular days
Dragging the cursor from

th st
the 13 to the 21 .
 Select a day and hold down the shift key and selecting another day will
highlight the days in-between.
th
Select the 7 , hold down
the Shift key and select the
nd
22 .
 Holding down the Ctrl key while selecting days allows for a random selection
of days.
Hold down the Ctrl key and

select random days.
 Clicking on the day of the week display bar will highlight the complete
month.
Click anywhere on the

week display bar to select
the whole month.
11-8 Schedules
Schedule Features
Calendar Views
Yearly View
 A double left click on a day will display the Daily View for that particular
day.
A double left click on

st
the 1 will display
the Daily View for
that day.
 A right click on a selected day or a range of selected days will display a pop-
up menu allowing for 2 choices:
1. Assigning a User Defined Standard Day will designate that day to a

specific Defined Standard Day that was created, by the user, in the
Standard Day list located to the left of the schedule.
2. Reset to weekly schedule will remove the User Defined Day and set it
back to the weekly standard day schedule. The User Defined Day will be
removed from the Exception Schedule and will prompt you to do so before
the change is performed.

Schedule Features
Calendar Views
Weekly View
The weekly view displays the full week of a month along with the active and in-
active times for each day.
Note: To display the corresponding week for the selected day in the yearly view,
double click on the desired day in the yearly view to display the daily view. Now
select the weekly view to display the corresponding week for that day. This is a faster
method rather than scrolling through the weeks to get to the desired location.
Weekly View
 To scroll through the weeks, click on the appropriate arrow at the top of the
schedule.
Previous Week Next Week
11-10 Schedules
Schedule Features
Calendar Views
Weekly View
 Displayed at the lower and upper left of the weekly schedule is a symbol of an
arrow with 3 dots beside it. These symbols indicate that there is more active or
inactive time below or above the displayed time frame.
More Inactive Time
… Inactive time continues above

the displayed time frame
… Active time continues below

the displayed time frame
More Active Time
Note: Depending on the visible spectrum of time determines which activity

arrows are displayed.
 Use the scroll bar to the right of the schedule to scroll through the full
spectrum of time.
Active Time Inactive Time
Position the scroll bar to view the desired time

Schedule Features
Calendar Views
Daily View
Daily View
 To scroll through the days, click on the appropriate arrow at the top of the
schedule. The current day displays Thursday, January 01.
Previous Next
Day Day
11-12 Schedules
Schedule Features
Calendar Views
Daily View
Active Time Inactive Time
Position the scroll bar to view the desired time
 Use the scroll bar to the right of the schedule to scroll through the full
spectrum of time.
 To set the time-line increments, refer to the weekly view.
Note: To see more of the schedule events on the weekly and daily views, increase the
size of your schedule window as you would increase the size of any Microsoft
window.
Collapsed View Expanded View

(Full View)

Schedule Features
Exception and Standard Days
On the left side of the Schedule editor are 2 tabs - Exception and Standard Days.
Each window shows an expandable tree structure.
Exception View Standard Day View
Exception View:
The Exception view displays the Exception Schedule list in a tree structure. The
Exception Schedule displays calendar entries such as single days, ranges of days and
recurring days that have been assigned. The Exception Schedule list also includes
User Defined Days created in the Standard Day window that have been assigned to
the schedule.
Note: If a User Defined Day was created in the Standard Day window but not
assigned to the schedule, that day will not be present within the Exception Schedule
until the User Defined Day has been assigned to a particular day within the schedule.
For example – The default User Defined Day (Holiday) will not be present in the
Exception Schedule until the Holiday has been assigned to a particular day within the
schedule.
11-14 Schedules
Schedule Features
Exception View:
When creating exceptions, the Exception Schedule identifies them in the list with the
following icons:
Single day
Range of days
When expanding an entry, its time values appear in the tree. The exception entries are
highlighted on the yearly view and noted in the weekly and daily views.
Single Day Exception
Defined as a
single day
Time values
Weekly View for 1/5/2004 Daily View for 1/5/2004
With an Exception Day, the weekly and daily views can display a noted message for
the start and end times.

Schedule Features
Exception View:
Range of Days Exception
Defined as a
range of days
Weekly view reflecting the Range of Days
11-16 Schedules
Schedule Features
Standard Day View:
The Standard Day view lists the Weekly Schedule tree (Monday through Sunday)
as well as the User Defined Day tree (Holiday, plus any other User Defined Day that
was created). Holiday is the only default User Defined Day.
When making changes to standard days, the changes take effect globally for all years
within the schedule and affect all objects set by that schedule. For example, if
changing the On time for Monday in the Weekly Standard Day Schedule, all
Mondays are updated with the new On time.
The color for Mondays

Standard Day has been
changed to orange and is
defined throughout the
calendar.

Editing a Schedule
All editing of Schedules is performed directly in the Schedule editor.
When making changes to the schedule, the Operator will be responsible for
creating/editing Standard Days (weekly or user defined) and editing/adding events to
selected day/s.
Assigning a Holiday
As a Continuum Operator, one task is to assign holidays to schedules. The following
procedure shows how to assign January 1st as a holiday.
1. From the yearly view, select (highlight) the day to be changed to a holiday. The
color for that day changes to dark blue indicating it is the selected day.
2. Right click on the selected day and from the pop-up menu select:
Assign a User Defined Standard Day > Holiday
The selected day is now designated as a holiday and the color for that day changes
to red.
Red
When assigning a User Defined Standard Day, that day will be added to the
Exception Schedule. Select the Apply button to apply the changes.
11-18 Schedules
Editing a Schedule
Assigning a Standard Day
Besides assigning holidays to a schedule, it may be necessary to change a day to a
standard weekday or weekend configuration. The following example shows how to
change January 1st back to a standard weekday.
1. From the yearly view, select (highlight) January 1st. The color for that day
changes from red to dark blue indicating it is the selected day.
2. Right click on the selected day and from the pop-up menu select:
Reset to weekly schedule
3. A window will appear asking:
Do you want to remove following exception schedule?

1/1/2004
Select Yes

Editing a Schedule
Assigning a Standard Day
January 1st has been changed back to a standard day and has been removed from the
Exception Schedule. Select the Apply button to apply the changes.
Light Blue
11-20 Schedules
Editing a Schedule
Editing Events for the Selected Day
Editing an Event in the Daily View
1. From the yearly view, double click on the day to be edited.
Double click to open the Daily view
2. The daily view opens for that particular day. The default active time is from 8:00
AM to 5:00 PM.

Editing a Schedule
3. Drag the scroll bar upward until 5:00 is visible on the time-line.
Place the cursor on the top edge of the active time (8:00 AM). The cursor will
change appearance into a vertical line with an arrow at each end. Hold down the
left mouse button and drag the cursor up to 6:00 AM and then release.
The active time now starts at 6:00 AM. This day is also added to the Exception
Schedule and displays the new time values.
To add a message, double click on the active time area.
11-22 Schedules
Editing a Schedule
In the start time notes area, type a message regarding that days event.
The message will appear in the active time area for that day. The active time area will
also turn red defining this day as an Exception day. Select the Apply button to apply
the changes.
Active - New training class starts today.

Update all computers in the large training
room with the current version of
Continuum.

Editing a Schedule
Editing an Event in the Weekly View
To edit events in the weekly view, drag the time bar to the desired time. See Editing
an Event in the Daily View for a detailed procedure.
The weekly view allows for editing multiple days within the same week.
The days that are edited will show up as an Exception in the Exception Schedule. In
this case, 3 days were edited and the 3 days are listed as Exception days.
Exception days allow you to add a text note by double clicking on the active area and
typing a note within that day’s editor. See Editing an Event in the Daily View for a
detailed procedure.
The yearly view will display these days as red exception days.
11-24 Schedules
Editing a Schedule
Changing Event Time Intervals
The left side of the weekly schedule displays a time-line that reflects a 24-hour clock
and defaults to a 15 minute time increment.
To change the time increments, right click on the time-line and from the pop-up
menu, select the desired increment.
15 minute time increment
Time Line with 15 minute time increments
30 minute time increment
Time Line with 30 minute time increments

Editing a Schedule
Adding a New Event to the Selected Day
A new event can performed from the Daily and Weekly Views.
1. From the Yearly View, double-click on the day for the event to be added. The
daily view will be displayed.
2. From the daily view, click anywhere above the Active time area to display the
Time Value editor.
Click anywhere in this area
11-26 Schedules
Editing a Schedule
3. The Time Value editor is displayed. Set the Start and End time to the new events
time frame.
Start Time is set to 6:00 AM
End Time is set to 7:00 AM
Note: The time must not already be a part of another event since event times can -
not overlap within a day.
In the Notes area, type a message defining the new event.
Select OK to accept these settings.

Editing a Schedule
The daily view updates to display the new event and is also added to the Exception
Schedule. Select the Apply button to accept these changes.
Use the same technique to add new events to multiple days within the weekly view.
11-28 Schedules
Editing a Schedule
Editing a Standard Day
When editing a standard day, the change will effect that day throughout the entire
schedule.
1. Select the Standard Day tab to display the weekly schedule.
2. From the weekly schedule, right click on the day to be edited and select Edit from
the pop-up menu.

Editing a Schedule
Editing a Standard Day
3. The edit window for that day will be displayed.
11-30 Schedules
Creating a Schedule
Schedules can be created either at the device, or from a folder. If creating a schedule
from a folder, it must be attached to a device. The device must be where the point (s)
controlled by the schedule are.
From the Device:
1. Right click the appropriate device to which the schedule will be attached to and
select New and then Schedule.
2. Enter an Object Name for the Schedule and then select Create.
The schedule will be saved in the Schedules Class folder attached to the device.
From a Folder:
1. Right click on the appropriate folder where the schedule will be saved and
select New and then Schedule.
2. Enter an Object Name for the Schedule.
Select Put object in device.
In the Device prompt, select a device for the schedule to be attached.
Select "Put object in device" Select a device

for the schedule
to be attached
The Schedule will be saved within this folder and a copy will also be saved to
the Schedules Class folder at the device to which this Schedule was attached.

Configuring a Schedule
Attach the object to be set by the schedule and define other schedule parameters.
Schedules are based on two types of times:
 Occupied - Specifies On times for the object being set by the schedule.
 Unoccupied - Specifies Off times for the object being set by the schedule.
Select the Configuration tab to display the Configure Schedule window.
Description:
Enter a description that identifies the purpose of the schedule. The description
shown here appears as one of the properties displayed on the Status page.
State:
When a schedule is Enabled, its attached object is automatically updated by the
system. A disabled schedule will not automatically update the attached object.
11-32 Schedules
Time Scale:
From the dropdown menu, select the number of minutes with which you want to
partition an hour in the daily and weekly views. Selections are: 5 minutes, 6
minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 60 minutes. The time scale applies
to the entire schedule.
For example, if selecting 15 Minutes, four time slots (demarcated by gray lines)
appear within each hour in the daily and weekly views throughout the schedule.
If selecting 5 Minutes, 12 time slots (demarcated by gray lines) appear within
each hour in the daily and weekly views.
Point Configuration
Occupancy Time:
Select an InfinityDateTime point that will automatically be updated with the value
of the next "on" time for the object set by the schedule.
Unoccupancy Time:
Select an InfinityDateTime point that will automatically be updated with the value
of the next "off" time for the object set by the schedule.
Occupancy Point:
Browse for the InfinityNumeric or InfinityOutput object that will be set by this
schedule. A schedule typically is used to turn something on and off at specified
times. An InfinityNumeric attached here will be turned on and off by the
schedule. Other Continuum objects that refer to that numeric, such as a Door, will
thus be regulated by this schedule.
Events
These five fields display current information about this schedule's events.
Present Value:
Displays the current event value: Active or Inactive
Occupancy Time:
Displays the specified occupancy time from the Occupancy Time field.
Unoccupancy Time:
Displays the specified unoccupancy time from Unoccupancy Time field

Events Cont…
Next Occupancy Time:
Displays the next day/time the schedule becomes active.
Next Unoccupancy Time:

Displays the next day/time the schedule becomes inactive.
Note:
Enter information about this schedule. This note appears in weekly and daily
calendar views.
11-34 Schedules
Automatic Schedule Download
Check this checkbox, and select a day and time, to download this schedule's
values automatically from the workstation database to the controller on which this
schedule was opened.
Use the day dropdown menu to select a day.
To select a time, click and highlight the hours, minutes, seconds, or AM/PM field
to select the hour, minute, second, and AM/PM, you want the automatic download
to occur. Use the up and down arrows to move to the previous
hour/minute/second and to select AM or PM.
Note: Schedules are downloaded from the database by the CyberStation that has
the Schedule's Auto Download setting checked on the General page of its editor.
The CyberStation downloads the schedules to the appropriate controllers.
Auto Download setting

at the CyberStation
If a workstation cannot download the next seven days at the appropriate time, the
previous seven days of the schedule remain in effect until they are overwritten.
Action
Download Events to Controller Now:
To download this schedule’s values to the controller immediately (and not wait
for the designated download day/time) click the Download Events to Controller
NOW button.

11-36 Schedules
Ch 12 Areas
&
Doors
Chapter Contents
 Access Control
 Access Control Terminology
 Resistor Types for Supervised Inputs
 Order of Configuration for Access Control
 Primary Access Server
 Configuring the Primary Access Server
 Areas
 Creating an Area
 Doors
 Configuring a Basic Door
 Testing The Door
 Advanced / Optional Door Configuration
 Configuring a Two Reader Door
12-2 Areas & Doors

Access Control
Access Control is the process of monitoring and controlling personnel entry into
facility locations through the control of door and gate operations. In the Continuum
environment, three objects are used to perform this function—areas, doors, and
personnel.
Area, Door and Personnel objects work together to unlock a door when authorized
personnel request to enter or exit an area.
 An Area is defined as a controlled space requiring passage through some type

of access control device to gain entry or exit (such as a door or gate). The
figure below shows three areas: Lobby, Lab, and Office.
 A Door is an entry/exit portal controlled by a hardware device (i.e., card

reader, keypad, or REX), leading to a predetermined area. Each door is
assigned to one or two areas. For example, Door 3 is attached to both the
Office and Lobby areas.
 Personnel objects relate to people assigned a card number and/or PIN to

allow them access to specified areas in a facility. Based on the areas assigned,
the person gains entry through the doors defined for the area. For example,
personnel with access to the Office area below are allowed entry/exit through
both doors 3 and 4.
Area 2 Area 3
Lab Office
Door 4
Door 2 Door 3
Area 1
Lobby
Door 1
Outside

Access Control Terminology
The following are words frequently used when discussing access control.
Card Reader
A device mounted on the wall next to a door, which reads site code and card num-
ber information for the control of personnel access to an area.
Keypad
A device mounted on the wall next to a door which controls personnel access
through a door to an area by verifying entered general code and/or personal
identification number (PIN) information.
REX
A Request to Exit device such as a motion sensor or push bar. This supervised
input unlocks the door when activated.
Door Ajar
Occurs when a door remains open longer than the number of seconds specified for
the Door Strike and Door Ajar attributes combined.
Forced Entry
Forced Entry is when the systems detects that the door switch open and there is no
valid reason for it (ie. No valid access or request to exit)
Door Switch
Used to provide feedback as to whether the door is actually open or closed.
Card Technologies:
 Wiegand
Weigand cards interface with a reader that uses two separate data signals
(Data1 and Data2).
 ABA
ABA cards interface with a reader that uses a single data signal and a
clock signal.
12-4 Areas & Doors

Resistor Types Used With Supervised Inputs
The following table summarizes the selections based upon switch configuration.
Circuit
Input Type Switch Type
Diagram
NOSeries Normally-open switch with a resistor in series.

NCSeries
series.
Normally-open switch with a resistor in

NOPar
parallel.

NCPar
parallel.
Normally-open switch with a resistor in parallel

NOSerPar
and an added resistor in series.

NCSerPar
parallel and an added resistor in series.

Resistor Types Used With Supervised Inputs cont…
The table below displays the value for each circuit condition
NCSeries
Open Open Infinite On
NOSeries
Closed Open Infinite Off
Open Closed 10K On
NCParallel
Closed Closed Zero Off
Open Open 10K On
Shorted Zero Off
NOParallel
Closed Open 10K Off
Open Closed Zero On
Shorted Zero On
NCSerPar
Open Open 10K On
NOSerPar
Closed Open 10K Off
Open Closed 5K On
12-6 Areas & Doors

Order of Configuration for Access Control
Areas, Doors and Personnel objects work together to check which personnel can
access which area/s.
The Configuration of Access Control Objects must be performed in the following

order:
1. Configure the Primary Access server.
2. Create the Area objects.
3. Create the Door objects and associate each Door with an Area object.
4. Create the Personnel objects and attach the Area objects to which the person
has access.
When finished, each Area object has a list of Door objects through which it enters and
a list of Personnel authorized to enter it.
Primary Access Server

Proper access control operation requires a workstation to be designated as the
Primary Access Server. The primary access server is responsible for recording
access events to the database. The primary access server’s Comm Status determines
the operating mode of the door.
In a single user workstation environment, there is only one workstation and will have
to be designated as the primary access server.
In a multi-user workstation environment, one of the workstations is designated as the

primary access server as well as designating a second workstation as a secondary
access server. The secondary access server acts as a backup if the primary access
server goes offline.
In addition to designating a workstation as the Primary Access Server, each

NetController’s Access Server System Variable value must be set to the ACCNetId
of Primary Access Server.
Note: For high traffic card access systems, it is recommended that a dedicated
workstation be designated as the primary access server.

Configure the Primary Access Server
1. From Continuum Explorer, right-click on the workstation that will act as the
primary access server and select Edit.
2. When the Workstation editor appears, check the Primary Access Server checkbox
and select OK.
3. A dialog box appears requesting to teach all devices. Select Yes.
Any time a new NetController is added to a system, a Teach must be performed.

Failure to do this will result in access events not being recorded.
12-8 Areas & Doors

Areas
An area is a space accessed only by passing through some type of access control
device. One or more doors can access an area.
An Area is a specific place accessed by 1 or more doors.
It could be necessary to define “Outside” as an area because at many secure facilities

it is equally important to have an access log reflecting when personnel have cleared or
exited the premises as well as when they entered.
Area 3 Area 4
Lab Office
Door 4
Door 2 Door 3
Area 2
Lobby
Door 1
Area 1
Outside
Creating an Area
1. From the Root of Continuum Explorer, create a folder called Area Folder.
2. Right-click on the Area Folder, select New and then Area.
3. Enter an Object Name for the area and select Create.


The Area Editor
General Page
Description:
To help users locate the area and understand its significance within the access
control system, enter a description using up to 32 characters, including spaces.
Known Occupancy Count:

Indicates the number of persons occupying the area at any given time.
The doors within the area must have both entry and exit readers. If doors are set
up with both readers, the system can count how many persons are actually in the
area. When personnel enter the area, the number is incremented. When personnel
exit the area, the number is decremented.
Current Lockdown Status:

Indicates whether the area is in lockdown:
 True indicates that the area is locked down.

 False indicates that the area is not locked down.
Lockdown Area:
Click the Lockdown Area button to prevent access through all doors to this area.
When an area is locked down, only personnel who are assigned executive
privilege access and have access rights to the area can enter or exit through doors
assigned to it. You select executive privilege access and assign area access rights
in the Personnel object for each person that you want to have this access.
Clear Lockdown Area:

Click the Clear Lockdown Area button to remove the Lockdown state from the
area. When you remove the Lockdown state, all doors to the area resume their
normal states. A door that provides access to another area that is still locked down
remains locked down until the Lockdown state is cleared from the other area.
12-10 Areas & Doors

The Area Editor
Doors to Area Page
The Doors to Area page displays all Door objects that provide access to this area as
well as the name of the door, its status as an entry or exit reader, and the device ID.
Doors can be directly edited from this list by right clicking on the appropriate door
and select Edit from its drop-down menu.
Note: Door objects are automatically added to an Area object when configuring the
Door Editor's Entry Reader and Exit Reader pages for a door object.
Lockdown Selected Doors:

Select one or more doors, and click the Lockdown Selected Doors button to send
the lockdown message to the doors.
Clear Lockdown Selected Doors:

To clear the Lockdown state for an individual door, the areas on each side of the
door cannot be in the Lockdown state .Select one or more doors, and click the
Clear Lockdown Selected Doors button to remove the Lockdown state from the
doors.
Name:
Displays the name of the door.
Entry / Exit:
Indicates whether a card reader (or keypad) controls access when a person enters
this area through the door or exits the area through the door.

The Area Editor
Doors to Area Page cont…
Device Id:
Displays the name and path of the controller to which this door is assigned.
Value:
Indicates whether the door is currently locked or unlocked.
ForceLock:
Indicates whether the door is in the Lockdown state:
 True indicates that the door is locked down.
 False indicates that the door is not locked down. This value is always
False for doors connected to a network controller that does not support the
area lockdown feature.
When a door is locked down, only personnel who are assigned executive privilege
access and have access rights to the area can enter or exit through doors assigned
to it. You select executive privilege access and assign area access rights in the
Personnel object for each person that you want to have this access.
12-12 Areas & Doors

The Area Editor
People with Access Page
This page displays all the personnel objects for persons who are authorized to enter
this area. They are automatically added when an area object is added to a Personnel
record.
Edit any personnel object from this list with a right click and selecting edit.

Doors
A door is defined as a portal, controlled by some type of access control device leading
to a predetermined area. A door can become part of two different areas, one on each
side, but only if it is configured as a two reader door.
Door objects are always created in the controller to which the door sensors, access
card readers, and keypads are wired.
When configuring a door, an area needs to be assigned, and then the name of the door
automatically appears in the area's Doors to Area page.
Note: A door can have two readers attached. Whether there's one or two readers, the
first step is to configure the entry reader. Only on a two-reader door is the exit reader
also configured.
Creating a Door
1. From Continuum Explorer, right click on the proper access controller, and select
New and then Door.
2. Enter the Object Name for the Door and select Create.
12-14 Areas & Doors

Door Editor
The exact configuration details for a Door Editor depend on whether the access
control devices are wired to a Continuum AC-1 / AC-1 Plus access control IOU
module or an Infinity ACX 781 InfinetController. An AC-1 and ACX can have a card
reader and a keypad wired in parallel.
General Page
Description:
Enter up to 32 characters including spaces to describe this door.
A good description can help others realize the door's significance and physically
locate it along with its access control equipment. A description can be used to
customize alarm messages.
Door Lock:
This is the value attribute for the door.
The Door Lock can be manually selected to lock or unlock but will only hold the
user selection if the State of the door is set to Disabled.
Door Switch:
Displays whether the door is physically open, closed or tampered with.
The Door Switch is a supervisory input that is automatically set by the system.
This field displays Opened, Closed, or Trouble.

Door Editor
Door State:
Select Disabled or Enabled.
When the Door is enabled, its values are automatically updated by the system.
An Enabled door will also perform Access Validation. When a Door is disabled,
values are not automatically updated. A disabled door will not perform Access
Validation.
Operating Mode:
Not implemented for this release.
12-16 Areas & Doors

Door Editor
Card Formats Page
Site Codes: (Wiegand format only)

Enter a valid site code for the door in one of the four fields.
Each set of cards are encoded with a single site code. If using multiple sets of
cards and each has a different site code, the door can be configured to accept up to
four different site codes.
If an AC-1 loses communication with its associated NetController, it will only

allow access for site codes from the first two fields.
General Code:
The General Code is a universal keypad code that will allow access through a
specific door.
Arm Code:
Not implemented in this release.

Door Editor
Card Formats Page
Card Format:
Select the card format that will be used with a specific door reader. Wiegand and
ABA are the two types of card formats available.
Weigand cards interface with a reader that uses two separate data signals (Data1
and Data2).
ABA cards interface with a reader that uses a single data signal and a clock signal.
 Wiegand Formats - If using Weigand Card formats, select the

appropriate Weigand Formats for the specific door.
If an AC-1 looses communications with its associated NetController, only

one Wiegand card format is allowed.
 ABA Formats - If using ABA card formats, select the appropriate ABA
Formats for the specific door.
ABA Format 1
ABA Format 2
Custom
12-18 Areas & Doors

Door Editor
Entry Reader Page
Reader IOU:
Set the number of the IOU module connected to the card reader if using an AC-1.
On NetControllers, IOU module numbers are on the General page of the

IOUModule editor.
On an ACX 700/780 InfinetController, leave the Reader IOU at zero
Reader Channel:
Set the channel number connected to the reader.
An AC-1 Reader Channel will always be channel 1.
Keypad Channel:
Set the channel number connected to the keypad.
An AC-1 Keypad Channel will always be channel 1.
Area:
Select the area to which this door will provide access.
Validate Reader or PIN:


Door Editor
Entry Reader Page
Access Validation (Credential 1 and 2):
Select one or more conditions the controller uses to decide whether or not to open
the door.
Use the Access Validation settings to determine how the controller validates
access information from this reader/keypad in the following Operating Modes:
 Normal: Devices, controllers, and the CyberStation workstation are

communicating normally.
 Comm Fail: The local controller and the CyberStation workstation that
manages access control information in your network (the access server)
are unable to communicate.
 No Database: The IOU module or controller is unable to obtain access

information from the database at the network controller. This can occur if
communication between the two has failed. It also occurs if the network
controller has been reset so that its database has no access data to provide.
You can select one or more validation conditions for each operating mode. To
gain access through this door, a person must provide valid credentials for all the
validation conditions you selected.
 Validate Site - Select this condition if you want the controller to require a
valid site code on the access card.
 Validate Card - Select this condition if you want the controller to require
a valid card number on the access card.
Access Validation (FIPS-PIV):
For a FIPS-PIV credential holder, specify conditions the controller uses to decide
whether or not to open the door. Use the Access Validation setting to determine
how the controller validates access information from this reader/kaypad in the
Normal, Comm Fail, and No Database operating modes.
 Validate Credential - Select this condition if you want the controller to

require a valid FIPS-PIV credential number on the access card.
12-20 Areas & Doors

Door Editor
Entry Reader Page
General Access Validation:
In addition to site, card, and credential, these other types of general-access

information can be validated.
 Validate PIN - Select this condition if you want the controller to check
the numbers pressed at the keypad to see if they form a valid personal
identification number (PIN).
 General Code - Check the numbers pressed at the keypad to see if they
match the general code you entered in the Card Formats tab.
 Door Forced Lock Schedule - Check this checkbox to control this door
with the following conditions:
 When the schedule is on, the door is locked but access is permitted
to all personnel by card swipe and/or keypad entry. (Allow use of
door.)
 When the schedule is off, the door is locked and card reader and
keypad access is denied to all personnel. (No Access)
 Personnel Schedule - Not implemented in this release.
 Reader Schedule - Not implemented in this release.

Door Editor
Channels Page
For the AC-1 Plus, the Alternate Door Access (ADA) options allows for configuring
a door to accommodate disabled persons by establishing longer door unlock and open
periods.
Door Output Channel:

Displays the channel number to which the door lock is wired.
For ACX 700 controllers, the value of this attribute depends on how the strike
controlling the door has been wired to the controller or the expansion units. If one
expansion unit has been used with the 700, its Door Output Channel is 4. If two
expansion units have been used, the second 190 Door Output Channel is 5.
On an AC-1 module the Door Output Channel will always be 1.
Invert:
Invert determines whether the relay for the door output will be energized or de-
energized for the locked and unlocked value. When unselected, the door output
relay will be energized when locked and de-energized when unlocked. With invert
selected, the door output relay will be de-energized when locked and energized
when unlocked.
12-22 Areas & Doors

Door Editor
Channels Page cont…
Door Strike Seconds:
Indicates the number of seconds the door will be unlocked. This applies to any
unlocking of the door such as valid access, request to exit or a momentary unlock
from a graphic. The door will remain unlocked for the door strike time or one
second after the door switch is opened (which ever occurs sooner).
Door Ajar Seconds:

Set the number of seconds, 0 to 255, that the door will be ajar after the Door
Strike Seconds have elapsed. This sets the door ajar attribute to true and can be
configured to generate an alarm if desired.
ADA Output Channel: (AC-1 Plus Specific)

Set the number of the ADA Output Channel to which an electronic door opener is
wired.
ADA Output Strike Seconds: (AC-1 Plus Specific)

Set the number of seconds for the door to remain unlocked after a valid access by
personnel with disabilities.
ADA Ajar Seconds: (AC-1 Plus Specific)

Set the number of seconds, 0 to 255; the door will be ajar after the ADA Output
Strike Seconds have elapsed.
Alarm Output Channel:

The channel number on this output will automatically be energized when any
alarm condition is active on this door.
Channel 9 on an ACX 781 controller is a spare channel. Connect it to a light or

some other signaling device physically near the door. In the event of an alarm,
this channel will be activated.
Use Channel 2 (Auxiliary) for alarm output on an AC-1.
Alarm Relay Seconds:

Set the number of seconds the alarm output channel remains energized when a
Door attribute goes into alarm.
Forced Entry Delay:

Provides a delay, in number of seconds, before a forced entry alarm will occur.

Door Editor
Exit Request Input Channel:
On a single reader door, an exit request switch is used to unlock the door when
exiting. This setting defines the input number that this switch is wired to.
The Exit Request Input for an AC-1 is Channel 3.
Exit Request Input Resistor Type:

Refer to the resistor types at beginning of chapter.
Unlock on Exit Request:

When checked, the output will be energized (de-energized with invert selected)
for the door strike time upon an exit request and forced entry will be suppressed.
When unchecked, this will shunt forced entries only.
Door Switch Input Channel:

Set the channel number, as it is marked on the controller, to which the door switch
is wired. The door switch input channel monitors whether the door is open or
closed.
The Door Switch Input for an AC-1 is Channel 2.
Door Switch Input Resistor Type:

Relock upon Door Closure:

Not implemented.
Bond Sensor Input Channel:

Set the channel number to which the bond sensor is wired. The bond sensor
determines the physical latch position. To get the number, look at the controller
hardware. Every input connection area (channel) on every type of controller is
numbered. Enter the channel number as it is marked on the controller.
Bond Sensor Input Resistor Type:

12-24 Areas & Doors

Door Editor
ADA Exit Request Input Channel:
Set the channel number to which the ADA Exit Request Input is wired. The ADA
Exit Request Input requests that the door be opened - when the request is
transmitted, the system presumes that the door is unlocked - to allow exit from a
restricted area for a disabled person. To find the channel number, look at the
controller hardware. Every input channel on every type of controller is
numbered. Enter the channel number as it appears on the controller.
ADA Exit Request Input Resistor Type:

ADA Input Channel:

Set the channel number to which the ADA Input is wired. The ADA input
requests that the door be opened - when the request is transmitted the system
presumes that the door is unlocked - providing a disabled person with entrance to
a restricted area. To find the channel number, look at the controller hardware.
Every input channel on every type of controller is numbered. Enter the channel
number as it appears on the controller.
ADA Input Resistor Type:


Testing a Door
After creating a basic door, verify that the door works as follows:
1. Create a cardholder that has access to that doors area and test the door with that
card. (Covered in the Personnel chapter)
2. Test the door with a cardholder that does not have access to the doors area.
3. From the Entry Status page in the door editor, verify the following:
Entry Status Page
Current Operating Mode:

Displays the current validation criteria for the door.
Last Person Admitted:

Displays the name of the person associated with the last card number or
access code used to go through the door.
Time Admitted:
Displays the time the last person went through the door.
Last Person's Department:

Displays the last person's department number.
Last Invalid Person:

Displays the name of the person who last attempted to enter but was not
granted access.
12-26 Areas & Doors

Testing a Door
Entry Status Page cont…
Last Invalid Time:
Displays the time of the last invalid attempt.
Last Card Number:

Displays the number encoded in the last valid card swiped.
Last Site Number:

Displays the site code encoded in the last card swiped.
(Wiegand cards only, as the last site number for ABA cards is always 0)
Entry Count:
Displays the total number of personnel that have entered through a door.
4. From the Access Event page of the door editor, verify that the Valid and
Invalid Access Events were delivered to the Primary Access Server.

Testing a Door
Access Event Page
Event Class Column:

Displays the Class (type) of access event that occurred.
Time Stamp Column:

Displays the time the access event occurred.
Person Column:
Displays the name and path of the Personnel object causing the event.
Area Column:
Displays the last known Area the personnel object was in.
12-28 Areas & Doors

Testing a Door
Access Event Page cont…
If nothing shows up in the access event page:
 Select Refresh to update the information.
 Verify that the primary access server was configured and a Teach was
performed.
 Verify that the reader is correctly wired and functioning properly.
If the access event page shows only invalid attempts:
 Check to see if the cardholder has access to this particular area.
 Go to the Entry Status to verify that the Last Card Number and Site Code
match the personnel object.
 Verify that the reader is correctly wired and functioning properly.

Advanced Configuration (Optional)
Use the door force lock and unlock InfinityNumerics to effect how the door operates.
InfinityNumerics can be controlled either by a schedule, program or a button on a

graphic.
Options Page
Door Force Lock Schedule:

An InfinityNumeric that is typically, but not required, to be controlled by a
schedule. The DoorForceLock numeric controls the reader / keypad and can be
directional. This requires additional configuration at Entry or Exit Reader page.
DoorForceLock:
On = Card Control
Off = No Card Access
Door Force Unlock Schedule:

An InfinityNumeric that is typically, but not required, to be controlled by a
schedule.
DoorForceUnlock:
On = Unlocked
Off = Card Control
12-30 Areas & Doors

Door Force Lock Schedule
Select an InfinityNumeric controlled by the Schedule to control this Door with the
following conditions:
- When this schedule is 'On', the door locks but permits access to all
Personnel by card swipe and/or keypad entry. (Allow use of door.)
- When this schedule is 'Off', the door locks and card reader and/or keypad
denies access o all Personnel. (No access.)
If associating a Schedule with this field, it must enable with the Access Validation
checkboxes on the Entry Reader and/or Exit Reader pages of the Door editor.
Door Force Unlock Schedule

Select an InfinityNumeric controlled by the Schedule to control this Door with the
following conditions:
- When this schedule is On, the door is unlocked and Continuum, in effect,
ignores this door and any other schedules attached on the Entry Reader and/or
Exit Reader pages of the Door editor.
- When this schedule is Off, the door locks but permits access to all Personnel by
card swipe and/or keypad entry. (Allow use of door.)
This technique is useful for a lobby where doors are to remain unlocked during
business hours, but have controlled access after hours.

Entry Options Page
In the Entry Options page, condition options are set that help enforce the access
validation choices and reader options, such as entry and egress violations, or
personnel requesting access during duress.
Reader Enable Schedule:

Department Point:
Select the InfinityNumeric point that records the department number of the last
person entered through the door. This number is recorded from the Personnel
objects Dept Number attribute on the Employee Info page.
Timed Anti-Passback Minutes:

Set the number of minutes during which an individual cannot enter through the
same area again. This guards against the practice of passing a card back through
an open door for someone else to use, or allowing someone else to use a PIN.
This field holds the last area someone was in for the duration of the anti-passback
minutes.
Zone Number:
12-32 Areas & Doors

Entry Options Page cont…
Reader Options (Single Reader Door)

Allow Entry on a Timed Anti-Passback Violation - Allows re-entry to an
area within the time limit set in Timed Anti-Passback Minutes.
The Primary Access Server will record the event as a Valid Entry Timed Anti-
Passback Violation
Anti-Passback Protection - Makes the controller check for individuals who

have tailgated.
A violation is logged when someone tries to gain access through this door
without obtaining valid access through other doors to reach this door. This can
occur if a person enters through a door that was opened for someone else who
provided valid access credentials.
Allow Entry on an Anti-Passback Violation - Permits access even though it

appears the individual has tailgated.
This checkbox is available when the Anti-Passback Protection checkbox is

selected.
PIN Duress - Lets personnel signal a duress situation using a keypad when
forced into an area by an unauthorized individual.
An alarm can be set for this condition.
Reverse Card Duress - Lets personnel signal a duress situation when forced
into an area by an unauthorized individual by swiping the card opposite from
the normal manner.
An alarm can be set for this condition.
Allow Entry Upon Reverse Card - Allows an entry when a card is swiped
opposite from the normal manner. (This does not work for proximity cards)
Anti-Passback Violation Only on Area Re-Entry


Configuring a Two-Reader Door
A two-reader door is used when a door requires both card-in and card-out access. An
exit reader will need to be created for this type of door.
Exit Reader Page

The Exit Reader page is configured the same way as the Entry Reader page
covered earlier.
12-34 Areas & Doors

Configuring a Two-Reader Door
In the Exit Options page, condition options are set that help enforce the access
validation choices and reader options, such as entry and egress violations or personnel
requesting access during duress.
Exit Options Page

The Exit Options page is configured the same way as the Entry Options page
covered earlier.

12-36 Areas & Doors
Ch 13 Personnel
Manager
Chapter Contents
 Creating a Personnel Record
 Personnel Manager
 Personnel Manager Menu Buttons
 Personnel Manager Configuration Menu Buttons
 Personnel Manager Options
 Personnel Manager Details Page
 Personnel Manager Details / Search Results Page
13-2 Personnel Manager

Creating a Personnel Record
1. From Continuum Explorer, right click on the folder that contains your Personnel
Records and from the pop-up menu select New > Personnel.
2. Define a name for the personnel record and then select the Create button

Personnel Manager
The CyberStation Personnel Manager is a powerful and easy-to use tool for creating,
viewing, and managing personnel records. The Personnel Import Utility allows you to
import third-party personnel data that was created outside of an Andover Continuum
system. It bridges the gap between other personnel databases and CyberStation
personnel records by allowing you to import and upload personnel data in large
amounts and save the imported data as CyberStation Personnel objects.
Use the CyberStation Personnel Manager for entering, viewing, and managing
personnel data:
 Security access information, such as card number and a list of the areas the
person may enter.
 Employee information, such as department name and number, supervisor
name, and vehicle information.
 Personal information, such as name, blood type, emergency contact, height,
weight, and hair color.
The data for each person is stored in a Personnel object. In the Personnel Manager, a
Personnel object can also be referred to as a record, card, or badge because the data in
the Personnel object may be associated with any of these.

Personnel Manager
Search Capability
In the Personnel Manager, you can quickly locate Personnel objects using the built-in
search feature. You can search by criteria such as first and last names, card number,
and employee number. You can enter full or partial information for the criteria.
Search results can display thumbnail photos from employee badges, if available.
Customizable Profiles for Viewing and Entering Personnel Data

The Personnel Manager uses profiles to streamline the process of creating new
Personnel objects by providing predefined lists of area access rights. You can also use
profiles to determine the personnel data displayed when users view, edit, or create
Personnel objects. Profiles enable you to limit user access to sensitive personnel data,
such as Social Security numbers and home phone numbers. The Personnel Manager
also supports the use of CyberStation personnel templates.
Simplified Area Assignment

The Personnel Manager provides several methods for adding or editing the list of
areas you assign to Personnel objects:
 You can specify the areas in profiles. The areas are then assigned in any
Personnel objects created from the profile.
 You can replace the areas in a Personnel object with the areas from a profile
or a personnel template.
 You can add or remove individual areas as needed in Personnel objects.
Regardless of the method that you use, schedule and clearance level information can
be included with the areas you assign to Personnel objects. This enables you to
customize the access rights for types of personnel (employee, contractor, visitor, etc.)
or for individual personnel as needed in your facility.
Personnel Enrollment from Card Reader

The Personnel Manager can automatically create new Personnel objects using
information from an access card that is read at a card reader that you designate. You
can edit these Personnel objects to enter additional information at any time. You can
also use this feature to identify the owner of an access card.

Personnel Manager Menu Buttons
Menu Buttons
Create / Edit Badge
If you have already purchased the separately sold badging software product,
Epibuilder, you can create a badge by setting up a location for badge layout files and
default badge formats.
In CyberStation Version 1.8 and higher, the EPIDesigner application replaces

Guard Draw as the badge layout tool.
EPIBuilder, with its EPIDesigner photo badge layout application, is purchased as

a special option. EPIBuilder is included on your CyberStation product key that
you insert into your computer. If your site has purchased EPIBuilder, TAC
activates the option inside the CyberStation key at the factory.

When attaching a photo when using the Create/Edit Badge option, at the top left side
of the Personnel Manager there is an area that will display the card holder’s photo.
Name:
Displays the name of the card holder
Department:
Displays the department at which the card holder works.
Expiration Date:
Displays the expiration date for that card

Issue Temp Card

The Issue Temp Card button saves the current card information and assigns a new
card number for this record. Restore Temporary Card restores the original card
information.
Issue a temporary card when you expect to reinstate the original card in the future.
Unlike marking a card as lost, issuing a temporary card enables you to restore the
original card.
Mark Card As Lost
Mark Card as Lost disables the current card. It renames it by appending “.Lost” to its
name and creates a new card with all of the same information as the current card with
the exception of the card number. A new card number is required.
Reset Access Rights
The Reset Access Rights button resets the access rights based on the selected profile
or template.
In the Personnel Manager, you can quickly assign areas specified in a profile or a
template to a Personnel object. Any schedule points and clearance levels attached to
the areas are also included in the Personnel object when you add the areas. When in a
Personnel object, you can edit the areas list as needed for the individual.
The Personnel Manager provides four predefined profiles: Employee, Contractor,

Temporary Employee, and Visitor. You can create additional profiles as needed.
You can also customize the predefined profiles.

Properties
The Properties button displays the Properties window which has 2 main functions:
1. To unlock a personnel file for editing from a read only edit locked status.
2. To reset a cardholders current area. In systems set up to prevent or discourage

tailgating, you may occasionally need to override the displayed current area if
the person accessed a different area without using his/her card or entering a
PIN and is now prevented from leaving an area.
If you want the Last Entered Area field to update automatically, every few
seconds, check the Auto Update checkbox.

Add Record
Use the Add Record button if you want to create a new personnel object.
Delete Record
Use the Delete Record button to delete the current personnel object.
Read Card Info
Use the Read Card Info button if you want to add card information from an access
card reader at your enrollment card reader (requires a card reader designated in the
configuration setting)
Configure
The Personnel Manager has default settings so that you can immediately create and
view personnel objects. However, using the Configure button allows you to
configure settings to customize many features, enabling you to enter and manage
personnel data more efficiently.
 Working with personnel profiles and templates

 Creating a personnel profile
 Assigning areas, schedules, clearance levels to profiles
 Assigning a profile to a user
 Deleting a personnel profile
 Customizing personnel attributes
 Selecting configuration settings
Note: The Configure button is disabled unless a Personnel object is currently

displayed in the Personnel Manager.

Personnel Manager Configuration Menu Buttons
Configuration Editor - Profiles Page
Select Profile
The Select Profile option allows you to create a new profile by selecting an
existing profile and saving it with a new name.
Path For New Personnel
Browse for the folder that this Personnel Record will be saved.

New
Select the New button to create a personnel profile that defines the information that is
entered and displayed from personnel objects in the Personnel Manager.
The Personnel Manager provides four predefined profiles: Employee, Contractor,

Temporary Employee, and Visitor. You can create additional profiles as needed.
You can also customize the predefined profiles.
Note: If you want Personnel objects created or edited using the profile to be
associated with a personnel template, be sure to add the Template attribute to the
Assigned Attributes list and select the template to use. Store personnel templates in
the Personnel Templates folder, which is a subfolder of the Templates folder.
Personnel templates stored elsewhere within CyberStation cannot be attached to
Personnel profiles or objects.
If you want to be able to attach a SecurityLevel object to Personnel objects, add the
SecurityLevel attribute to the Assigned Attributes list in the profile.

Delete
The Delete button will delete a custom profile that was created. You can not delete a
default profile.
Save As
The Save As option allows you to save an existing profile with a new name.
Assign Area
The Assign Area button opens the Assign Areas window and allows you to assign the
areas associated to this profile.
Assign Profile To User
Use this procedure to assign a profile to a specific user. The user sees only the
attributes defined in the assigned profile when creating, editing, or viewing Personnel
objects. Attributes that are not included in the assigned profile are not visible to the
user.

Customize Attributes
Use this button to edit personnel attributes. You can change the attribute display
name, limit the values that can be selected, and create or edit a list of allowable values
for an attribute. The changes that you make to the attributes apply to all profiles and
Personnel objects that use the attributes.
The attributes Info1 through Info6 are user-definable. You can use them to capture
personnel data that is specific to your company. For example, you can rename one of
these attributes to First Responder with predefined values of Yes and No to identify
employees to contact for assistance in emergencies.

In the Assigned Attributes list, select the attributes you want to include in your
profile, and then click the add attributes button to add the selected attributes to
the Assigned Attributes list.
You can select one attribute at a time, or select more than one by pressing the Ctrl or
Shift key while selecting.
It is recommended that you always include First Name and Last Name in a profile,
and also make these attributes required entries.
Arrange the attributes in the Assigned Attributes list:
 To remove an attribute, select it and click the remove attributes button .

The selected attribute moves to the Available Attributes list.
 To arrange the sequence of attributes in the Assigned Attributes list, select an

attribute, and click the up and down buttons to move it within the
list. The order you specify in this list determines the order in which the
attributes are displayed in the Details tab when you add or edit a Personnel
object using this profile.
Required: Check this checkbox to make an entry for this attribute required.
Read Only: Check this checkbox to make this attribute value read only; that
is, not changeable. It is not recommended that an attribute be
both required and read only.
Default: Enter a default value for this attribute. Users can edit the value in
Personnel objects created from the profile if Read Only is not
selected for the attribute and if the value is not inherited from a
template.

Configuration Editor - Settings Page
Show Thumbnails on Startup
To display thumbnail images of personnel by default with Search Results, check the
Show Thumbnails on startup checkbox. You can also display or hide thumbnail
images at any time in the Search Results tab.
Enrollment Reader
To select a card reader that you can use to read card information in the Personnel
Manager, check the checkbox for Enrollment Reader, and click the browse button.
Select the Door object to which the reader is assigned, and click the Select button.
Note: The enrollment reader does not need to be physically connected to a door.
However, in CyberStation, you set up all card readers by entering their settings in
Door objects.

Schedule Location
Click the browse button for Schedule Location. In the Select Schedule Location
dialog, select the folder or controller that contains schedule points for determining
when personnel can access specific areas, and click the Select button.
When you attach schedule points to areas in a profile or Personnel object, you can
select a different folder or controller, if needed.
Default Profile
Under Default Profile, select the profile that the Personnel Manager uses to display
Personnel objects for any users who are not assigned another profile. The default
profile is Employee.
A personnel profile is a collection of settings that you can use to view existing
Personnel objects or to create new objects in the Personnel Manager. The profile
determines what personnel data is visible to users. You can assign different profiles to
different users as needed to prevent unauthorized access to sensitive personnel data.

Personnel Manager Options
Person Enabled
Allows you to Enable and Disable all cards associated with a loaded Personnel
record.
Visitor
Check the Visitor checkbox if a person is a visitor to your facility. This will allow
you to run a ListView of all visitors within your facility.
ADA
If a person requires additional time to pass through a door, like a handicap person,
check the ADA checkbox. Selecting this check-box will use the ADA settings on the
Channels page of your Door editor.

Access Rights
The Access Rights area allows you to assign individual areas to a Personnel object.
In this example the card holder has access to the Gym and Lobby.
 To Assign an Area: Under Access Rights, expand the UnAssigned option

and check the checkbox next to each area you wane to assign.
 To Remove an Area: Under Access Rights, expand the Assigned option and
clear the checkbox next to each area you wane to remove.
Assigned Areas
 GymINS
 LobbyINS
UnAssigned Areas
 LabINS
Clicking on the Add Schedule icon opens up the Add Schedules dialog and
allows you to assign a schedule point to an area.

The Clearance Level for areas enables you to provide different access privileges to
different areas assigned to the same person. The clearance level you assign to an area
in a Personnel object does not affect the access of other personnel with access to the
same area.
Areas with a clearance level of zero (0) use the value entered for the Default
Clearance Level to determine access to the area for this person.
The Enable Area checkbox allows you to Enable and Disable particular areas
assigned to a card holder.
Select this option for people that seldom access the facility if the controllers memory
is an issue due to a large facility.

Personnel Manager Details Page
The Details page displays all the Attributes for a Profile that where defined during the
configuration process. All required attributes will be display with an asterisk (*)
which are defined during the configuration process also.

Personnel Manager Details / Search Results Page
New Search
Selecting the New Search button presents the following screen and allows you to
search for card holders by: First Name, Last Name, Social Security Number,
Employee Number, Card #, Department or Department Code. Leaving these fields
blank will display all Personnel records.
Set the Maximum Results setting to limit the amount of Personnel records
displayed.
The Find Now button will display, in the Search Results page, all the Personnel
records that correspond to the fields that where filled in when the New Search
was performed.
Show Thumbnails
When checked, this option displays the card holder’s photo that was attached to
their Personnel record.

Ch 14 Active
EventView
Chapter Contents
 What is an Active EventView
 Opening an Active EventView
 The Active EventView
 Working in the Active EventView
 Creating an Active EventView
 Event View Editor
14-2 Active EventView

What is an Active EventView
An EventView object determines which access-related events will display in an
Active Event View.
Active EventViews are used to monitor access-related activities. These activities

include the use of card readers and/or keypads to gain access through locked doors, or
trouble situations such as a door left ajar, keypad tampering, or forced entry. Active
Event Views also provide information such as whom is using which door, when, and
whether the door re-locks properly. Event views are called “active” because they
receive and list live access events.

Opening an Active EventView
The Active Event View must be configured by the Continuum Administrator in order
to be accessible for an Operator.
The floor plan below shows a button, that when clicked on, will launch the Active
Event View for the Main Office door.

The Active EventView
The Active Event View lists the events associated with the specified object. Based on
how the active event view has been configured by the Administrator, it can show
events for one door, a group of doors, all doors, or doors associated with a particular
area.
The events are shown in chronological order with the most recent event presented
first. Each row displays columns of information related to a particular event. Event
information can be displayed in a variety of colors to depict different categories of
events.
The Title Bar shows that the Active Event for the Main Office View is currently
displayed
Menu Bar Options

Object Menu
The Object Menu provides options to perform Print functions and Exit the Active
Event View.

Menu Bar Options
View Menu
The View Menu provides the option to display or not display the Toolbar and
Status Bar.
Sort - rearranges the event list.
Freeze - stops the automatic update of the window.
Always on Top - keeps the Active Event View window open (on top) of other
Continuum windows.
Add/Remove Columns - allows for selecting what event information is

displayed.
Event View Object – Displays the Active EventView editor.

Quick Pick Icons
The following table describes the Active Event View quick pick icons:
Icon Description
Print screen, not available in this release.
Toggle to the Active Event View “freeze” mode—no new or updated event
information is added to the current view.
Toggle to the Active Event View “live” mode—new and updated event
information is automatically added to the current view.
Open the Event View Object window (administrative function).
Open the online help system.
Active Events & Event Details

Events appear in rows within the window, as they occur. The most recent event
appears in the first row at the top of the list. When a new event occurs, the list scrolls
down do make room for the new item. The columns contain event detail information.
Scroll Bars
Horizontal and vertical scroll bars may be presented when working with the Active
Event View. If the list contains many rows and columns of information, which does
not all fit in the window, then use the scroll bars to view the additional event
information.

Working in the Active EventView
As mentioned previously, the Active Event View is a dynamically updating list. By
default, the view lists all of the event details in columns. Use the scroll bars to access
the information not displayed in the window.
Two options are available for changing the way the information is presented in the
view:
 Resize the column width

 Add/remove columns
Resizing Columns
Resize column widths by pointing on the vertical dividing line between two columns
(as shown below.)
When the cursor changes to a double arrow , then hold down the mouse button
and drag the column boundary to the left or right.
Removing / Adding Columns from the View

Modify the settings for the view to remove (or add) columns from the display. To
accomplish this, choose the option Add/Remove Columns from the View pull-down
menu. A dialog box appears.
Click on the box to the left the columns to be removed from the view. The check
mark is removed from the box indicating the column has been deselected. Click on
the OK button to save the changes and have the view updated to reflect the column
removal.
Conversely, to add columns to the view, click in the box so a check mark appears,
and then click OK to save the changes

Dragging Columns
The columns within an EventView can be rearranged by dragging a selected column
to the desired spot.
While dragging, a red line will appear between

the columns defining the new location
The Door column now appears between the Person and Area columns.

Details View
Viewing event information can be accomplished through the Active EventView or the
Event Details View. The Details View conveniently displays all of the event
information in one window and may find easier to read the event information.
Double click any event in the Active EventView to see the Details View of that
event. The Details View displays all the Active EventView column information in a
single dialog.
Type:
Indicates what type of event occurred.
Date and Time:

Indicate when the event occurred.
Message:
Displays a text string describing the event condition.
Door:
Indicates at which door the event occurred.
Personnel:
Shows the person associated with the card reader or keypad event.

Details View cont…
Area:
Shows what area the event occurred (where door is located).
Controller:
Displays the name of the controller the door is attached to.
Department Point:
Indicates the department point number of the person causing the event (if one has
been defined for the person).
Zone Code:
Not implemented.
Card #:
Shows the access card number of the person causing the event.
Card Type:
Indicates the type of access control card used by the person causing the event.
Site Code:
Displays the site code assigned to the person causing the event (if one has been
defined for the person).
Pending Access Distribution:

Changing the Sort Order
Another Active Event View setting that can be modified is the sort order for the event
information. By default, events are listed chronologically (date/time) with the most
recent event in the first row.
To change the sort order, choose the Sort option from the View pull-down menu. A
dialog box appears showing the current settings.
Access the Sort Criteria window by selecting Sort… from the View menu.
Specify three sort criteria where the primary occurs first, secondary next and tertiary
last.
For each one, specify the following:
1. Click on the down arrow to see a list of the event fields.
2. Choose the field for the sort.
3. Select the ascending text box to indicate how the information is sorted (no
check mark is equivalent to descending order).
4. When all the sort criteria have been entered, click on OK to save the changes
and update the view with the new sort criteria.

Creating an Active EventView
Prior to creating an EventView object, make sure the appropriate Access Events have
been selected on the Options page of the door editor.
Use the EventView Editor to specify the types of events, the doors to monitor, the
sorting criteria for the events, and to configure the font and color for each event. Once
an Event View object has been created, users on any Continuum workstation can
monitor events as they occur in an Active Event View.
1 From the Root of Continuum, right click and select New and then EventView.
2. Enter an Object Name for the EventView and then select Create.
For organizational purposes, consider creating a LiveEvents folder and then create the
EventViews from that folder.

EventView Editor
General Page
Description:
Enter a description that explains which doors and event types will display in the
Active Event View.
Maximum Number of Events:

Not implemented in this version.
Maximum Time in View:

Not implemented in this version.
Sort Criteria:
Sort events according to three columns.
The Active EventView displays several columns of information for every event,
according to the sort criteria selected here.
Sorting is useful for grouping events to look for trends in, for example, the source
of events, types of events, and which personnel are accessing which doors most
often.
From the Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary dropdown menus, select up to three
columns. The columns selected establish the sort order that the Active EventView
uses.
Select the ascending check box to sort in ascending order, or clear it to sort by
descending order.

EventView Editor
Doors Page
Uncheck Selected:
Unchecks all items within the selected column.
Add Door:
Adds doors to the EventView.
Doors can also be added to the EventView from the Explorer by using the drag
and drop technique.
Remove Doors:
Removes the highlighted door objects from the list.
Check Selected:
Checks all items within the selected column.

EventView Editor
Fonts and Colors Page
The Fonts and Colors page is for configuring the font, text color and background
color for every event type. All event types are listed on the page.
For example, a green background could be used for valid access events, yellow for
invalid attempts and red for door ajar events. Configuring fonts in this way helps the
operator quickly differentiate events.
Right click to
access menu

Ch 15 Alarms
Chapter Contents
 Continuum Alarm System
 Responding to an Alarm
 Active Alarm View
 Alarm Details View
 Alarm History
 Viewing Alarm Video
 Video Layout Options
 3 Steps for Configuring Alarms
 EventNotification
 Creating an EventNotification
 EventNotification Editor
 AlarmEnrollment
 Creating an AlarmEnrollment
 AlarmEnrollment Editor
 Attaching Alarms to a Point
 Testing Alarms
15-2 Alarms
Continuum Alarm System
One of the most important tasks an Operator performs is monitoring and responding
to alarms. An alarm condition occurs when the value of an object, or one of its
attributes, changes to a state outside of defined normal operating conditions or a
specified range.
For example, an alarm can be triggered when a door has been forced open or left ajar.
In a HVAC system, a temperature sensor can trigger an alarm when the temperature
gets too hot or too cold.
Alarms are displayed to the workstation through the Alarm Bar and the Active
Alarm View.
Note: The Continuum Administrator configures the normal operating and alarm
conditions for system objects.
Alarm Bar
The Alarm Bar, located at the bottom of menu pages, displays the most recent active
alarm.
Five icons for quick response to an alarm condition appear on the alarm bar.
Icon Description
Acknowledge the alarm. Clicking the Acknowledge icon indicates awareness of

the currently active alarm, which is displayed in the alarm message area
View an associated Graphic for the currently active alarm (if one has been
configured.)
Run an associated Program for the currently active alarm (if one has been
configured.)
Silence (mute) the audio alarm, which may be playing to alert someone of the
currently active alarm.
Alarm Function runs an associated Function for the current Active Alarm if one
has been configured.
Launch the Active Alarm View application, which monitors all of the active
alarms.

Responding to an Alarm
Responding to an alarm and providing useful information about the alarm situation is
often vital to building safety. An Operator will perform a series of actions to respond
to alarms. The recommended three-stage process is:
Step 1
Silence the alarm.
Step 2
Do something about it and enter information into the system describing what
actions are being taken.
Step 3
Acknowledge the alarm.
Investigating the cause of the alarm, taking the appropriate actions to address the
situation that caused the alarm condition, and recording the actions taken (step 2) is
the most important function to be performed.
15-4 Alarms
Active Alarm View
The Active Alarm View lists the active alarms in chronological order with the most
recent alarm presented first. Each row displays information related to a particular
alarm condition. Alarm information can be displayed in a variety of colors depending
on how a control system is configured.
Typically, the Active Alarm View will be configured to pop up automatically when
an alarm occurs.
Title Bar
The Title Bar shows that the Active Alarm View is currently displayed.
Menu Bar
Just beneath the Active Alarm View title bar is the menu bar. The menu bar consists
of the following menus.
 Object
 View
 Acknowledge
 Mute
 Help

Active Alarm View
Object Menu
The Object Menu provides options to perform print functions and exit the Active
Alarm View.
View Menu
The View menu consists of the following options. A check mark to the left of a menu
option indicates that option is selected. The following table provides a description of
the View Menu options.
Tool Bar - Displays the tool bar when selected. Hides the tool bar when not
selected
Status Bar - Displays the status bar when selected. Hides the status bar when
not selected.
Sort… - Displays the Sort Criteria dialog, which defines the criteria for sorting
the contents of the Active Alarm View.
15-6 Alarms
Active Alarm View
View Menu cont…
Auto Sort - Automatically sorts the contents of the Active Alarm View
whenever a new alarm is received, according to the criteria defined in the Sort
Criteria dialog.
Freeze - Stops alarm list scrolling when selected. No new Alarms are received
when the Active Alarm View is frozen. Allows alarm list scrolling when not
selected.
Add/Remove Columns… - Allows the user to add or remove columns from

the Active Alarm View.
Always on Top - The Active Alarm View is placed on top of all other windows
on your desktop.
Hide - Hides the Active Alarm View. When the Active Alarm View is hidden,
the alarm view icon blinks in the alarm tray.
Alarm Status Line - Places the active alarm viewer into status line mode.
The alarm that appears in the alarm status line is the first alarm (at the top of the
list) that either has not been acknowledged or has been acknowledged but does
not have the Remove From Status Line When Acknowledged box checked in the
Event Notification object assigned to the alarm. In status line mode, the Active
Alarm View list never appears. Likewise, in alarm view mode, the alarm status
line never appears.
Alarm Enrollment… - Displays the Alarm Enrollment editor associated with

the selected alarm.
Event Notification... - Displays the Event Notification editor that is associated

with the selected alarm.
Object… - Displays the object editor of the object that is associated with the
selected alarm.
Program Output… - Displays and runs the report program that is attached to
the object that is associated with the selected alarm.
Graphic… - Displays graphic panel (in the Pinpoint graphic editor) of the object
that is associated with the selected alarm.

Active Alarm View
Acknowledge Menu
Acknowledging an alarm lets other operators know that the alarm has been seen and
appropriate actions have been taken. When using one of the following methods to
acknowledge an alarm, the person’s user name will appear in the alarm’s
Acknowledged By column and the current date and time will appear in the
Date/Time of Acknowledgement column.
Method 1
Click on the ACK button to the left of the alarm that is to be acknowledge.
Method 2
Select an alarm by clicking on it, and then click the icon in the tool bar.
Method 3
Click the icon in the tool bar to acknowledge all active alarms in the list.
Method 4
Select Ack Selected or Ack All from the Acknowledge menu instead of clicking
on the icons mentioned previously.
Note: Ack Selected in the Acknowledge menu does not apply the Ack Rules that
were set in the General tab of the Event Notification editor. Ack Selected only
acknowledges alarms that are selected individually. First select the alarm that is
to be acknowledge by clicking on it, then click Ack Selected or the ACK button
to the left of the selected alarm.
15-8 Alarms
Active Alarm View
Quick Pick Icons
Icon Description
Print screen, not available in this release.
Acknowledge all alarms.
Acknowledge selected alarms.
Freeze \ Restart the scrolling list of active alarms.
Run a report previously defined on the Alarms page of the object that caused the
alarm.
Display a graphics panel previously selected on Alarms page of the object that
caused the alarm.
Runs an associated function.
Display the object editor of the object that is associated with the selected alarm.
Display the event notification editor that is associated with the selected alarm.
Display the alarm enrollment editor associated with the selected alarm.
Automatically sort the contents of the alarm viewer whenever a new alarm is
received, according to the criteria defined in the Sort Criteria dialog, which is
accessed via the View menu.
Access the Help topics for Active Alarm View.

Active Alarm View
Active Alarms and Alarm Details
Alarms appear on the rows in the window, as they occur. The most recent alarm
appears in the first row at the top of the list. When a new alarm occurs, the alarm list
scrolls down do make room for the new alarm. The columns contain alarm detail
information. Some of the columns are editable such as User Action and Operator
Text.
Scroll Bar
Horizontal and vertical scroll bars may be presented when working with the Active
Alarm View. If the list contains many rows and columns of information, which does
not all fit in the window, then use the scroll bars to view the additional alarm
information.
Acknowledge and Silence Buttons

To the left of each alarm, Acknowledge and Silence buttons exist making
it easy to quickly acknowledge and/or silence the alarm.
When Acknowledging an alarm, the system records the persons user name and the
date and time of the acknowledgement. The Active Alarm View automatically
updates to reflect the acknowledgement information letting other system users know
the alarm has been seen and are taking the appropriate steps to address the problem.
Silencing an audible alarm is considered a soft acknowledgement action because the

system reflects the awareness of the alarm and records the person's user name, the
date and time of the silencing.
When either of these actions is performed, their associated icon changes appearance.
For example, Alarms that have been acknowledged show a check mark next to the
text ACK. The Silence icon reflects an "X" behind the speaker picture.
15-10 Alarms
Alarm Details View
Viewing and modifying the alarm information can be accomplished through the
Active Alarm View (described after this section) or the Alarm Details View. The
Details View conveniently displays all of the alarm information in one window.
Working in the Details View makes it easier to read the alarm information and enter
Operator Text and User Actions.
To open the Details View, double-click on an alarm.
Date / Time
Indicates when the alarm occurred.
Name
Reflects the object or point associated with the alarm
Value
Shows the value of the point or object when the alarm was triggered.
To State
Indicates whether the alarm in is an Alarm, Returned to Normal, or Fault state.
Priority
Relates to the criticality of the alarm

Alarm Details View
Message
Displays a text string describing the alarm condition.
Acknowledged By
Displays the user name of the person who acknowledged the alarm (if it has been
acknowledged.)
Date/Time of Acknowledgement
Displays the date and time of acknowledging the alarm (if it has been acknowledged.)
Silenced By
Displays the user name of the person who silenced the alarm (if it has been silenced.)
Date/Time of Silence
Indicates when the silence action was performed.
Event Notification \ Alarm Enrollment

Administrative functions.
Operator Text*
Provides a place to enter a message about the alarm condition. Enter up to 70
characters.
Operator Text is extremely useful for providing additional information about the
alarm condition, the object causing the alarm, or to indicate what actions have already
been taken to address the problem.
User Actions*
Provides a pull down list of actions to be taken in response to alarms. This field
provides additional information about how the problem is being addressed and
corrected. Examples of user actions include Call Emergency, Call Security, and
Dispatch Technician.
If after displaying the list of user actions, there isn't an action that accurately
describes the response, type the action taken in the Operator Text field.
* Operator Text and User Actions entered in the Details View will not be saved
unless the alarm is acknowledged in this view.
Note: An ACK button appears at the bottom of the window. From the Details View,
the user can acknowledge the alarm by clicking on this button.
15-12 Alarms
Working in the Active Alarm View
As mentioned previously, the Active Alarm View is a dynamically updating list.
New alarms appear at the top of the list and alarm details automatically change to
reflect the current alarm condition (e.g., the State changes from Alarm to Return to
Normal.)
By default, the view lists all of the alarm details in columns. Use the horizontal scroll
bar to access the information not displayed in the window. Two options are available
for changing the way the information is presented in the view - resize the column
width and add/remove columns from the view.
Resizing Columns
Resize column widths by pointing on the vertical dividing line between two columns
(as shown below.)
When the cursor changes to a double arrow , hold down the mouse button and
drag the column boundary to the left or right.
Removing/Adding Columns from the View

Modify the settings for the view to remove (or add) columns from the display. To
accomplish this, choose the option Add/Remove Columns from the View pull-down
menu. A dialog box appears:
Click on the box to the left the columns to be removed from the view. The check
mark is removed from the box indicating the column has been deselected. Click on
the OK button to save the changes and have the view updated to reflect the column
removal.
Conversely, to add columns, click in the box so a check mark appears and then click
OK to save the changes.

Working in the Active Alarm View
Entering Operator Text and User Actions
Entering information about the alarm situation and actions being taken is a critical
task an Operator performs. In the Active Alarm View, the columns Operator Text
and User Actions are used for this for function.
 For Operator Text, double click in the operator text column for a particular
alarm. A cursor appears in the box allowing to type a message. Enter up to
70 characters of information and press the ENTER key to save the change.
 For User Actions, right click in the user actions column for a particular alarm.
A down arrow appears in the box. Click on the arrow to see the list of actions.
Select one of the actions.
Note: When working with a particular alarm, it may help if the automatic update of
the view is stopped. This way the alarm will not scroll down the list when new
alarms occur. To do this, click on the Freeze icon (stoplight). When finished, click
on the icon again to resume the live update.
Changing the Sort Order

Another Active Alarm View setting that can be modified is the sort order for the
alarm information. By default, alarms are listed chronologically (date/time) with the
most recent alarm in the first row.
To change the sort order, choose the Sort option from the View pull-down menu. A
dialog box appears showing the current settings.
15-14 Alarms
Viewing Alarm History
In addition to monitoring active alarms, it may necessary to review past alarm
information that has been stored in the Continuum database. To look at alarm history,
ListViews are utilized. Continuum’s ListViews menu page contains default Alarm
ListViews.
Alarm history is useful in diagnosing recurring problems. For example, the

supervisor may ask to research numerous Motion Detection alarms in a particular
area. Or, gather information about a temperature sensor, which continually triggers a
too hot alarm.
Example of an Alarm ListView

Viewing Alarm Video
The VideoLayout object will display live video images from a single surveillance
camera or from multiple cameras set up in a matrix of video image frames.
The Video Layout object can be accessed from a graphical control panel, or be
configured to display when a point goes into alarm (either automatically or by
selecting the Video Layout icon from the Active Alarm View toolbar).
Active Alarm View Video Layout Icon
Active Alarm View Tool Bar
Video Layout Icon
15-16 Alarms
VideoLayout Options
Text Overlay Check Box

Selecting this checkbox will display the name of the camera, as well as the date and
time, over each video control frame of the matrix.
Top Radio Button

Selecting this radio button positions the text at the top of each frame.
Bottom Radio Button

Selecting this radio button positions the text at the bottom of each frame.
Text Colors Matrix

You may change the color of the text in the text overlay by clicking one of the six
colors in the color key.
These colors are:
 Red
 White
 Blue
 Black (default)
 Green
 Yellow
Brightness / Contrast / Sharpness Sliders

Use the slider control to increase and decrease the brightness, contrast, or sharpness.
The slider controls blink to indicate which setting is currently selected.
Reload Layout Button

Select the Reload Layout button to reload and refresh all the video controls.

VideoLayout Options
Freeze All Video Button

Click this button to freeze every video image in every video control frame.
To freeze the image for just one video control, right click on the control frame and
select Freeze Video from the popup menu.
Capture Image
Click this button to capture the image being displayed (live or recorded) in the
selected video control frame and save it to a file.
Browse for the directory in which you want to save the image file, specify the file
name, specify the image file type (.BMP, .JPG, and so on), and click Save.
15-18 Alarms
3 Steps for Configuring Alarms
There are 3 steps required for configuring alarms in a Continuum system.
1. Create an EventNotification object(s).
EventNotification objects determines what will happen in response to an alarm.
2. Create an AlarmEnrollment object(s), each of which is associated with an

EventNotification object.
AlarmEnrollment objects define the set of conditions used to determine when a

point is in an alarm state.
3. Attach the AlarmEnrollment to the point object.

Event Notification
EventNotification objects are linked to alarm enrollment objects and basic alarms.
One EventNotification can be associated with multiple alarm enrollment objects.
The event states that are processed by Event Notification objects are:
 Alarms
 Returns to normal
 Alarm faults
In addition to event routing, Event Notifications define which hours events will be
reported, and what actions are taken upon receiving the event such as:
 Emailing
 Paging
 Logging
 Printing
 Displaying the alarm view
 Displaying graphics
 Running programs
 Playing audio
Event Notification objects provide prioritization of events, repeat timer functionality,

acknowledgement rules, color-coding and deactivation criteria.
Note: When working with EventNotification objects, be aware that when editing
existing attributes, it changes the way every associated basic alarm and
AlarmEnrollment object is delivered.
15-20 Alarms
Creating an Event Notification
An EvenNotification is created from the Root of Continuum Explorer.
1. Right click on the Root of Continuum Explorer and select New and then
EventNotification.
2. Give the EventNotification an Object Name and select Create.
Note: For organizational purposes, it would be a good idea to create a folder and
name it Alarms and Events. From this folder, create the EventNotification
object.

Event Notification Editor
General Page
Description:
Enter a description of up to 32 characters (including spaces) into the Description
field.
Priority:
Enter the priority number in the event state fields:
 Alarm
 Return to Normal
 Fault (Applies to BACnet only)
Priority numbers help sort events in the Active Alarm View. Sorting by priority
number allows for displaying critical events at the top of the active list. In the
Active Alarm View, determine whether high or low priority numbers display at
the top by selecting either ascending or descending as the sort order.
The range of priority numbers is 0 to 254.
Colors and Fonts:

Every event state, can display custom colors and font styles. To select these colors
and fonts, follow these steps:
1. Place the cursor in the Alarm Colors, RTN (Return to Normal) Colors, or
Fault Colors window, depending on which state to modify.
2. Right click over the text in that window. A pop-up menu appears.
3. Select Font, Background Color, or Text Color, and modify the Font and
Color dialogs, accordingly.
15-22 Alarms
Repeat:
Set a number in minutes for reissuing an event only if the alarm remains active.
The repeat interval specifies how many minutes the workstation waits until
reissuing the event. When an event is reissued, its repeat actions are carried out.
Reissuing continues until the event is either silenced or acknowledged.
Ack Rules:
Acknowledgement rules simplify the task of acknowledging alarms whose Event
Configuration objects are configured for multiple entries.
From the Ack Rules drop-down menu, select one of the following options:
 AckAll
 AckUntilTime
 AckOnlyThisOne
These acknowledgment rules apply when there are multiple entries for the same
alarm condition for the same alarmed object.
Event Configuration:
From the Event configuration drop-down menu, select either Multiple Entry or
Single Entry.
This determines whether or not the Active Alarm View will display an additional
entry every time the event changes state. Single Entry is recommended, as this
will decrease the number of entries in the Active Alarm View. If selecting
Multiple Entry, select an acknowledgment rule as well.
Note: There may be many references to Fault within this editor. Fault applies to
BACnet alarms only.

Actions Page
Print Alarm:
Sends the alarm to the system printer.
Only prints on a workstation selected as a printer in the Delivery page.
Print Return to Normal:

Sends the Return to Normal to the system printer.
Print Fault:
Sends event notification to the system printer.
This action requires the Fault report option to be selected and that a workstation
be selected as a printer in the Delivery tab page.
Print Acknowledgement:
Sends the acknowledgement of the alarm to the system printer when the alarm is
acknowledged.
Run Program:
Runs the Plain English program specified on the Alarms or Advanced Alarms tab
pages of the alarmed object's editor.
Not available for basic alarms.
Remove from Status Line on Acknowledged:

When checked, this option removes the event from the status line when
acknowledged.
When unchecked, the last alarm will be displayed on the alarm status line
15-24 Alarms
Actions Page cont…
Beep on Alarm:
Causes workstations to beep continuously when the alarm is delivered.
Beep on Return to Normal:

Causes workstations to beep continuously when a Return to Normal is delivered.
Beep on Fault:
Causes workstations to beep continuously when event is in a Fault state.
Play Audio on Alarm:

Plays an audio file in the event of an alarm that was selected from the
EventNotification or Alarm Enrollment Feedback page.
Play Audio on Return to Normal:

Plays an audio file in the event of a Return to Normal that was selected from the
Play Audio on Fault:

Plays an audio file in the event of a Fault that was selected from the
Display Graphic:
Displays the Graphic specified on the Alarms or Advanced Alarms page of the
object editor.
Display Alarm View:

Displays the Active Alarm View when the alarm is received
Blink on Alarm:
Causes events to blink in the Alarm Status bar.
Note: When Continuum is minimized, its task bar icon will blink instead.
Email on Alarm:
Sends the Alarm to all email recipients in the email distribution list.
Email on Return to Normal:

Sends the Return to Normal to all email recipients in the email distribution list.
Email on Fault:
Sends the Fault to all email recipients in the email distribution list.

Actions Page cont…
Page on Alarm:
Sends a Page to all pager recipients in the pager distribution list.
Page on Return to Normal:

Page on Fault:
Page on Acknowledgement:
15-26 Alarms
Delivery Page
The Delivery page is where to create a recipient list. Every workstation in the list will
receive and view events associated with this Event Notification object in their status
line and in their Active Alarm View
The Delivery page involves the following tasks:
 Adding and Removing a Recipient
 Distributing Tasks to Workstations
Add Recipient Button:

Select this button to add recipients to the Delivery page.
Remove Recipient Button:

Select a recipient from the list and select the Remove Recipient button.

Delivery Page (Recipient Configuration Window)
Recipient:
Only CyberStations are valid as alarm recipients.
Valid Days:
Defines which days of the week this recipient will receive alarms.
From Time / To Time:

Defines when, during valid days, this recipient will receive alarms.
Note: A single CyberStation may be configured as multiple recipients, with

different additional tasks (printer, emailing) at different times.
15-28 Alarms
Delivery Page (Recipient Configuration Window) cont…
Additional Alarm Responsibilities for CyberStation
Primary / Backup / Repeat:
A Primary CyberStation will always perform these tasks if online.
A Secondary CyberStation will perform these tasks if no primary CyberStation is

online.
A Repeat CyberStation will perform these tasks if a Repeat of Alarms occurs.
Print - Prints alarms, returns to normal, faults, and acknowledgements as

checked on the Actions page to a Windows default printer.
Forward - Sends notification to the other workstations in the recipient list,

used for all alarm acknowledgements, alarm silencing, as well as delivering to
CyberStations with an ID of zero (0).
Log - Logs CyberStation Alarm Activity, Silence, ACK, User Action and
Operator Text.
It is recommended that every event notification have a primary logger

selected.
Email - Sends email to everyone in the email distribution list for Actions
checked.
Paging - Pages everyone in the pager distribution list for Actions checked.

Deactivate Page
The selections within this page determine when an alarm is removed from the active
alarm viewer.
Acknowledged:
Removes the event when it is acknowledged.
Returned to Normal:
Removes the event when the event status returns to normal.
Acknowledged OR Returned to Normal:

Removes the event when either the event status returns to normal or is
acknowledged.
Acknowledged AND Returned to Normal:

Removes the event when both the event status returns to normal and is
acknowledged.
Acknowledged AFTER Returned to Normal:

Removes the event when it is acknowledged only after its status returns to normal.
15-30 Alarms
Feedback Page
The Feedback page is where (.wav) audio files are associated with each event state:
 Alarm
 Fault
Use .wav audio files when a recorded message or sound is to play on workstations
when an event is delivered. Associate a different audio file to each event state. This
is useful for alerting and informing operators of the specific and appropriate response
for different event states.
Guidelines for associating audio files:
 For every audio file, select the corresponding action on the Actions page.
 Select files for Alarm Enrollment objects. Every Alarm Enrollment object has
a designated Event Notification object that defines how the alarm will be
delivered. When an Alarm Enrollment object with audio has an Event
Notification object with audio files, the Alarm Enrollment audio files take
precedence.

AlarmEnrollment
AlarmEnrollment objects define the set of conditions used to determine when a point
goes into an alarm state. The Alarm Enrollment object specifies the text messages that
appear in the Alarm Viewer and Alarm Bar.
When creating objects in Continuum, there can be 8 alarm conditions attached to that
object. For example, an InfinityInput object could be created so that an alarm is
enabled when the temperature gets to high and also when the object is disabled.
Each AlarmEnrollment object is associated with an EventNotification object.
AlarmEnrollment
EventNotification
The AlarmEnrollment object

is associated to the
EventNotification object
15-32 Alarms
Creating an AlarmEnrollment
An AlarmEnrollment is created from the Root of Continuum Explorer.
1. Right click on the Root of Continuum Explorer and select New and then
AlarmEnrollment.
2. Type an Object Name for the AlarmEnrollment object and select Create.
Note: Because the AlarmEnrollment is associated to the EventNotification, it

would be a good idea to create the AlarmEnrollment From the Alarms and Events
folder as the EventNotification was.
AlarmEnrollment Object
EventNotification Object

AlarmEnrollment Editor
General Page
Description:
Enter a description of up to 32 characters (including spaces).
Event Notification:
Browse for an Event Notification object.
Alarmed Attribute:
Select an attribute from the drop-down menu.
Based on the algorithm parameters that were set on the Algorithms page, the
value of the attribute selected from this list, triggers the alarm.
For most applications, the Alarmed Attribute will be Value.
Alarm Type:
Selecting an Infinity Alarm Type determines what fields are displayed on the
Algorithms page.
 Expression
 Infinity Low Limit
 Infinity High Limit
 Change of State
 Command Failure For use with BACnet
 Floating Limit
 Out of Range
15-34 Alarms
Notification Type:
Not Implemented
Send:
When checked, each Send option causes the event to be displayed to the Active
Alarm View and all recipients on the notification list when the associated point
changes to that status.
 Alarm
 Fault

Algorithms Page
The Algorithm fields that are presented on this page change depending on the
Alarm Type you selected from the General page.
 Infinity High Limit
When selecting Infinity High Limit as an Alarm Type, the following fields
appear on the Algorithms page:
- High Limit
- Return to Normal
This algorithm is used with Infinity objects to report an alarm if the alarmed
attribute value changes to a value that is equal to or above a High Limit that
was specified. You also specify a value that must be reached, before a Return
to Normal state can be reported.
Time Delay:
In the Time Delay field, set the number of seconds that you want to postpone
the alarm.
Using time delays cuts down on the number of active alarm. This reduces both
system traffic and operator responsibility by filtering out some nuisance
alarms.
15-36 Alarms
Algorithms Page cont…
 Infinity Low Limit
When selecting Infinity Low Limit as an Alarm Type, the following fields
appear on the Algorithms page:
- Low Limit
- Return to Normal
This algorithm is used with Infinity objects to report an alarm if the alarmed
attribute value changes to a value that is equal to or below a Low Limit that
was specified. Specify a value that must be reached before a Return to Normal
state can be reported.

Algorithms Page cont…
 Expression
An Expression can test for any alarm condition referring to any attribute of the
alarmed object as well as referencing up to four additional objects generically
referred to as Point1 – Point4.
State is Disabled
General Expressions for both Security and HVAC applications:
State is Disabled
Alarm is generated when a user disables this object
Override is True
Alarm is generated when this object has been manually overridden
15-38 Alarms
Algorithms Page
 Expression cont…
Security Specific Alarm Expressions:
DoorAjar is True
Door is held open for longer than DoorAjar time and Door Strike Time
ForcedEntry is True
DoorSwitch seen open without a Valid Access, Request to Exit or Operator
command
InvalidAttempt is True
An individual without access to this area attempted to card in at this door
Value = Trouble
Wiring fault on Supervised InfinityInput
Doorswitch = Trouble
Wiring fault on door switch input of Door
ExitRequest = Trouble
Wiring fault on Exit Request switch of door
and Point1 = On
Add to any of above expressions and expression will only be true when linked
point for Point1 is on

Algorithms Page
 Expression cont…
HVAC Specific Alarm Expressions:
Value is not between 65 and 75

Out of range
Elecvalue is not between 1 and 5

Failed 4-20 Ma sensor
Value <> Point1

Status alarm for Digital Output with corresponding Status Digital Input
Abs(Value-Point1)>5
Attach to Temperature input, link Temperature Setpoint to Point1. Alarm
when off setpoint by more that 5
Abs(Value-Point1)>5 and Point2 = On

Works like above, but only when Occupancy Numeric linked to Point2 is on
15-40 Alarms
Feedback Page
Text Messages:
Write a different alarm message for each possible event state:
 Alarm
 Fault
Continuum supports "wild card" characters '%n' and '%d', which insert the
corresponding name and description of the alarmed object.
A good text message alerts operators to the nature and severity of the alarm.
Audio Files:
Use an audio file when recording a message or sound to play on workstations
when an event is delivered.
Associate a different file with each event state. This is useful for informing
operators of the specific and appropriate response for different event states.

Feedback Page cont…
For every audio file added to this page, select the corresponding action on the
Actions page of the associated Event Notification object. If associating an audio
file with an alarm, make sure the associated Event Notification object has Play
Audio on Alarm selected on its Actions page.
Some Event Notification objects have audio files associated with event states as
well. When an Alarm Enrollment object with audio has an associated Event
Notification object with audio files, the Alarm Enrollment audio files take
precedence.
Every reported event has an attribute named To State.
The value of this attribute is determined by the status of the point that triggered
the event. At any given time, a point has one of three possible states: Alarm,
Return to Normal, and Fault:
Alarm:
When a point’s value or one of its other attributes changes to what has been
previously established in the point as being outside normal operating standards,
the point’s status changes to Alarm. When this happens, the controller broadcasts
the status change as an alarm event. This event displays in the Active Alarm View
with a To State value of Alarm. The associated Event Notification object
determines how and to whom the event is broadcast.
Return to Normal:
When the point’s value or one of its other attributes changes back to what has
been previously established in the point editor as normal, the point’s status
changes to Normal. When this happens, the controller broadcasts the status
change as an event if the Alarm Enrollment object, or the basic alarm associated
with the point has the Return to Normal report option selected. This event
displays in the Active Alarm View with the State value of Return to Normal. The
associated EventNotification object determines how and to whom the event is
broadcast.
Fault:
When a device that is local to the point detects a fault, the point is said to be in a
Fault state. Note that the ability to detect faults and the messages associated with
faults varies depending on the device manufacturer. When this happens, the
controller broadcasts the status change as an event if the Alarm Enrollment object,
or the basic alarm associated with the point has the Fault Report Option selected.
This event displays in the Active Alarm View with a To State value of Fault. The
associated Event Notification object determines how and to whom the event is
broadcast.
15-42 Alarms
Attaching Alarms to a Point
Once the appropriate EventNotification and AlarmEnrollment objects have been
created, attach the AlarnEnrollment to the point being alarmed.
Use the Alarms page for Infinity objects to attach up to eight AlarmEnrollment
objects to the point.
Alarms Page
Enabled:
After attaching an AlarmEnrollment object in one of the eight alarms fields, select
the Enabled checkbox to the right of the field to activate that attachment.
Graphic:
Attach a graphic panel file that will be display when the object goes into an alarm
state.
Program:
Attach a program that will run when the object goes into an alarm state.

Attaching Alarms to a Point
Alarms Page cont…
Alarm Points:
The Alarm Points button allows you to attach up to 4 alarm points to be used with
expression alarms attached to this point.
15-44 Alarms
Testing Alarms
1. Disable the point that the alarm is attached to and set its value so that it will
put the point into alarm. Take appropriate measures to ensure that this does
not have adverse effects on the operation of your building.
2. Be sure that the appropriate actions configured in the EventNotification take

place.
3. Check the object editor for the point in alarm. The Alarm Status will be
displayed on the General page of the editor.
Note: When alarming a door object, use the Command Line to verify the
alarm status.
On = Active Alarm
Off = Normal
Print Door Alarm1…Alarm8
4. If the alarm status is not accurately represented on the editor, return to the
event notification alarm enrollment editor to verify accurate configuration
information.
Active Alarm View
Red - Alarm Condition
Green - Return to Normal Condition

15-46 Alarms
Ch 16 Integrating
Video
Chapter Contents
 Introduction to Video Administrator
 Accessing Video Administrator
 Video Administrator Interface
 Introduction to Video Monitor
 The Video Monitor Interface
 Video Monitor - Active Video Events List
 Video Monitor – Video Control Frames
 Video Monitor – Door Events, Door Status & Person Events
 Introduction to VideoLayout
 Creating a VideoLayout
 The VideoLayout Editor
16-2 Integrating Video

Introduction to Video Administrator
Video Administrator is CyberStation's powerful video configuration tool (Version 1.82
and higher) that allows you to configure cameras, doors, and points so that security
personnel at your site can display and monitor video surveillance images in the Video
Monitor, all in an integrated Andover Continuum access-control system.
Using Video Administrator, you can search for and add doors and points, and for each
door or point, you can assign up to 16 cameras — a primary camera plus up to 15 more
cameras from which to choose. When an alarm event is triggered, based on something
happening at a door or to a point, the Video Monitor launches, showing and recording
images from the door's or point's assigned camera.
Video Administrator allows you to configure the amount of time to record when an alarm
event is triggered, including how many seconds to play back before and after the record
time. You can also manipulate the video images using pan-tilt-zoom presets. Through
Video Administrator, you can ask to be notified when a camera loses and can't transmit
its video images and/or when a camera detects motion.
Video Administrator also has powerful tools for listing point/camera configurations in
tabular format and displaying important information about the point-camera assignments.
For example, for points, you can see at a glance the point names, what types of points
they are, their system locations, how many cameras are assigned to each point, and so on.
For each assigned camera, you can see at a glance the camera name, its server name, its
configured record times, and so on. This view is highly customizable, whereby you can
adjust the view, based on point type, point path, point name, server name, camera name,
and so on.

Accessing Video Administrator
How to open Video Administrator
1. From the Windows Start menu select:
Programs / Continuum / Video Administrator

Video Administrator Interface
The Video Administrator contains 3 pages:
 Points
This tab allows you to add doors/points, add, configure, and remove cameras, and
preview a camera's video images. You can also arrange and customize the view
of the points, servers, and cameras.
 Alarms
On this tab, for every video server and every camera belonging to a server, you
can monitor certain server/camera events, such as motion detection and loss of
video images, and generate alarm messages established for Integral brand DVRs.
 Settings
This tab allows you to specify an executable program, so that you can execute it
from Video Monitor's Run button.

Points Page
The Video Administrator Points tab, allows you to add points, add and remove
cameras, configure server and camera properties (including PTZ and recording times)
as well as perform a video preview of a selected camera.
The different sections of the Points tab are as follows.
Menu bar — This is the menu bar running along the top of the points tab allows
you to add a point, add a camera to a point, remove an entry, and expand,
collapse, and customize the view of the information presented on the tab.
Click the Add Point button to add a door or a point to which you want to
assign cameras.
The Browse dialog appears, allowing you to search for and select the
door/point you want to add. Once you have found the point, highlight it and
click Select. The new point appears in the pivot table list.
Note: Before you can add a door/point, it must already be configured in

CyberStation. Also, if you select a door/point that is already added, Video
Administrator notifies you that's already listed.

Points Page
Menu Bar
Click the Add Camera button to assign a camera to an existing door/point on

the Points tab.
First, in the pivot table list, you must select and highlight the point to which
you want to assign the camera. When you click Add Camera, a new row for
the added camera appears in the camera list beneath the selected point.
Configure properties for the right-hand camera configuration properties pane.

Specifically you must select a Server and Camera, and specify a Record Time,
Pre-Record Time, Post-Record Time, and PTZ.
Note: For each door/point a maximium number of 16 cameras is allowed.

If you have already reached this limit, but attempt to add a camera, a
message informs you that you have reached the maximum.
Click Remove Entry to remove a camera from a door/point.
Expand the door/point so that its assigned cameras are visible in the pivot
table list. Select the camera you want to remove, and click the Remove Entry
button. A Delete Row dialog appears. Click Yes to delete the row or No to
leave it in the pivot table list.
Note: If a door/point contains only one assigned camera, and you remove
that camera entry, the entire door/point is removed from the pivot table
and the Administrator.

Points Page
Menu Bar
Select All, Expand All, and Collapse All perform the following operations.
Note: The following descriptions assume that entries are listed (and arranged)
in the pivot table according to Point Type - Point Path.
Select All: Allows you to select/highlight all the camera selections within a
door/point. Expand the door/point and click Select All.
Expand All: Click Expand All to expand door/point entries, displaying all
camera assignment entries for all doors/points.
Collapse All: Click Collapse All to collapse all door/point entries, hiding all
camera assignment entries.
The View dropdown menu allows you to alter the view of the pivot table - how
entries are grouped (or arranged), and in which hierarchy.
To do so, select the View field's dropdown arrow and select one of the following
arrangements.
Note: The currently selected arrangement appears in the View field.
Each selected arrangement is illustrated in the graphical arrangement (groupings)

pane located above the pivot table and below the menu bar.
Point Type - Path: This is the default arrangement. This view displays both the
point path and type, in that order. That is, the top level entries are Point Type,
where all the InfinityInputs, InfinityNumerics, Doors, and so on, are grouped. If
you expand a Point Type, all the points of that type are listed. You can then
expand the point for its camera assignments.

Points Page
View Drop-down Menu (continued)
Point Type: This view allows you to see the available points arranged by type
such as InfinityNumeric or InfinityInput.
Point Path: This view allows you to see the available points by path. The path
can list the network name, controller name, subcontroller name, and the point
name.
Server: This view allows you to see points listed according to the video server
(DVR) to which they're configured.
Custom: The custom view allows you to make your own arrangements/views,
according to your own needs, when none of the other choices is suitable.
To create a custom arrangement, drag and drop the name of a column heading
from the pivot table's camera list to the graphical arrangement pane located above
the pivot table and below the menu bar. For example, you can drag Camera up to
the arrangement pane. Or you can create a custom arrangement dragging one or
more column heading and concatenating it to an existing predefined arrangement.
For example:
Point Type - Server
Mix and match custom arrangements until you have a few that work for you.

Points Page
Pivot table — The main viewing pane for the Points tab is called the Pivot
Table.
On the Points tab, the Pivot Table displays a great deal of information about a
door or point and its assigned cameras in a tree-like navigational hierarchy. This
includes point type, point path, point name, server name, camera name, record
time, and so on. You can easily rearrange how all this information is displayed,
based on any one of these categories, as well as select, expand, and collapse
entries, via the Points tab menu bar.
The Pivot Table comprises:
 An Arrangement Pane (the top section) displaying a graphical

representation of the structure's current hierarchy — how the items are
currently grouped.
 A main Viewing Pane (the larger pane) where you can see a list of entries.

Points Page
Pivot table cont…
Using the Arrangement Pane on Points Tab
The Arrangement Pane on the Points tab is a narrow pane located just above the
main viewing pane and below menu bar items. Here you can accept the default
arrangement, select a predefined arrangement using the View dropdown menu on
the Points tab menu bar, or build a custom arrangement.
To build a custom arrangement, you may click and drag items within the
arrangement pane to change the hierarchical structure or you can click a column
heading in the main viewing pane and drag it up to the arrangement pane. That is,
you can click and drag the name of a column heading from the pivot table's
camera list to the arrangement pane, concatenating them into your own custom
hierarchy, or you can click and drag a column heading and concatenate it to an
existing predefined arrangement.
For example:
Point Type - Server
Expanding, Collapsing, Altering View of Pivot Table
Using the menu bar, you can use the following buttons and menu to alter and
customize the view in the pivot table:
 Select All
 Expand All
 Collapse All
 View dropdown menu - where you can choose a predefined view or

make your own custom view with click-and-drag capabilities. This works
in conjunction with the arrangement pane, as described above.

Points Page
Configuration Properties — Allows you to configure camera properties.
From here you can preview a selected camera's images, alter the position/view of
the camera via PTZ presets, and specify record times.
Video Preview
The video preview window allows you to see the assigned camera's position
and view, when an alarm event is triggered. Recording will commence using
this view.
Check the Video Preview checkbox if you want to see the camera's current
position and view. This checkbox is not checked by default.

Points Page
Configuration Properties
Video Preview (Continued)

PTZ Preset: This is for testing a PTZ (pan-tilt-zoom) preset. The camera
position/view can be determined by the PTZ, only if presets are available,
configured, and enabled in the camera's DVR server. If presets are not
enabled, then a default camera view is shown. If presets are enabled for the
DVR, then you can use PTZ Preset to test each position/view until you see
one that best suits the camera location. When you find the right preset, select
that preset in the PTZ field. (See PTZ, below.)
Note: If presets are not enabled in the DVR, then changing preset
numbers in PTZ Preset makes no differences. The view does not change.
The same default view appears, regardless.
Beneath the preview window, the server name, IP address, and video server's
user login name are displayed.
Server
When assigning or modifying a camera for a door/point via the menu bar,
select a server from the Server field's dropdown menu.
Note: This server must have already been configured as a VideoServer

object.
Camera
Select a camera, associated with the server, from the Camera field's dropdown
menu.
Record Time
Specify the number of seconds to record on this camera, beginning at the
moment when an alarm event is triggered.
The maximum record time for cameras on Digital Sentry (DS) video servers is
3600 seconds (60 minutes). For cameras on DVX and DVXi video servers,
the maximum time is 1200 seconds (20 minutes).

Points Page
Configuration Properties
Pre-Playback Time
Specify the number of seconds to play back before the actual alarm for this
camera is triggered.
Post-Playback Time
Specify the number of seconds to play back after the recording specified in
Record Time finishes.
PTZ
Assign a PTZ (pan-tilt-zoom) preset position for the camera's position/view.
This is the preset that the camera moves to on an alarm.
Note: In order to use presets, they must be available, configured, and

enabled in the camera's DVR.
Record on Alarm
Check this checkbox to enable recorded video from this camera. (If this box
is not checked, this camera will not record on alarm.)
When you add a camera, this box is checked by default.
Explanation
Displays a text description of the field in which you have placed your cursor -
for example, if you click on Server, the explanation text is: "The name of the
DVR." This text acts as a "tool tip."

Introduction to Video Monitor
Video Monitor is CyberStation’s powerful video-surveillance tool.
Video Monitor, available in CyberStation Version 1.82 and higher, allows you to
view live and recorded video images from cameras assigned to doors or points that
trigger alarm events. It allows you to monitor doors, immediately capture video
images from doors, unlock a door, monitor door status, monitor a person's access to
doors, and get alarm information as soon as it happens.
You customize the way Video Monitor operates using its powerful configuration tool,
Video Administrator. Using Video Administrator, you can attach up to 16 cameras to
a door or point. Video Monitor is launched when an event associated with the door or
point triggers an alarm.
Another video surveillance monitoring tool, VideoLayout, is also available for video
matrix-frame viewing. The system may be configured to use either Video Monitor or
Video Layouts as your primary video interface.
To use Video Monitor and its Video Administrator, your site must have purchased
these applications from TAC. If so, it is assumed your workstation has already
enabled in CyberStation via your CyberStation security key.

The Video Monitor Interface
The Video Monitor application’s main screen comprises the following three main
sections.
Active Video
Events List
Video Control
Frames
Door Events
Door Status
Person
Events
Active Video Events List – The Active Video Events list, located along the
top of the Video Monitor, lists recent alarm events (both door events and point
events) as they happen. For each event, detailed information is displayed. In a
door event listing, you can also actually unlock the door, momentarily. (The
number of seconds the door is momentarily unlocked is determined by what was
set in the Door Strike Seconds attribute on the Channels tab in the Door editor
for that Door object.)
Video Control Frames – The video control frames section, located in the
middle of the Video Monitor, comprises the two frames in which video images
are displayed. For the camera associated with a door or point, the right-hand
frame displays live video images, while the left-hand frame displays recorded (or
live) images. This frame area also has video-image search, record, and playback
buttons, and controls for video resolution and visual aesthetics.
Door Events, Door Status, and Person Events – These three tabs along
the bottom of the Video Monitor display access-event and current-status
information about a door and/or a person. Specifically, Door Events displays the
latest access events for the door in alarm. Person Events displays access events
of a person associated with doors.

Video Monitor - Active Video Events List
The top pane of the Video Monitor main screen lists recent, active alarms. This is called
Active Video Events. When an alarm on a door or a point occurs, an event appears at
the top of the list for that door or point event, and video is recorded, based on that event.
From this list, you can momentarily unlock a door, clear an event, and view other useful
information.
Type:
Displays the type of alarm event. This is typically either an active event happening at
a Door or happening to a point. If it is a Door event, the word Door is displayed. If it
is a point, the name of the point — for example, Analog Input — is displayed.
Manual event — The other type of event that can be displayed is Manual. A
manual event represents an immediate recording at a live camera, when the operator,
seeing something suspicious, clicks the manual red record button at the bottom of the
video frame showing the live image.
Time Stamp:
Displays the date and time at which the event was triggered.
Point Name:
Displays the name given to the door or point.
Unlock:
Displays a graphical button that you can click to momentarily unlock the locked door
associated with the selected event. (The number of seconds the door is momentarily
unlocked is determined by what was set in the Door Strike Seconds attribute on the
Channels tab in the Door editor for that Door object.)
Note: This button appears only in a Door event.
Point Path:
Displays the system location where the door or point resides.
Clear:
Displays a graphical button that you can click to remove the selected event from the
Video Events list.

Video Monitor - Active Video Events List
Recording:
Displays a blue progress bar when video recording is actually happening on the event.
The progress bar appears when the alarm is triggered. It is based on the duration of
the Record Time and Post-Playback Time established in the Points tab configuration
properties in Video Administrator.
When recording stops, the word Ready is displayed in this field.
Note: Recorded video images do not play back in the left-hand frame automatically.
To play back the video just recorded, double click the active video event. If only a
partial segment of the recording plays back, the video server may still be processing
the recording. Please continue to double click the alarm until the entire recording is
ready.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note: Be aware that, depending on how the EventNotification object is configured

for an alarm event, the same alarm may repeat indefinitely and appear in the list a
number of times with new timestamps. Recording also repeats every time the alarm
event repeats.
If you don't want the same alarm (and recording) to repeat, specify 0 (number of
minutes) in the Repeat field on the General tab of the EventNotification editor for
the event. The repeat interval (number of minutes) specifies how many minutes to
wait until reissuing the event. If you want to repeat the alarm (and the recording)
every X number of minutes — specify this interval in the Repeat field.
Run Button
Click this button in the upper right-hand corner to execute the program or application
(executable file) that you specify on the Settings tab of the Video Administrator.
This can be a Plain English program or something like a Windows executable, such
as Notepad or Windows Calculator. The name you give the program appears to the
right of the word Run. For example:
Run - Calculator
Run - Notepad
Run - LockAllDoorsToArea program
Note: If no application is specified on the Settings tab of Video Administrator, this

Run button does not appear.

Video Monitor – Video Control Frames
The two video control frames are located side by side in the middle of the Video Monitor.
You view all images here.
Right-hand Frame: The right-hand frame always shows live video images. By
default, it shows live images from the camera associated with a selected door or point
event.
Left-hand Frame: The left-hand frame usually displays recorded images, but can also
display live images.
The left-hand frame can display two types of recorded images:
 Playback of recorded video — You can play back previously recorded video
from a camera — usually the camera associated with a selected door or point
event, though you can select another camera.
 Playback of X number of minutes from the live camera — You can play back
the last 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 60 minutes, 24 hours (or another time duration)
from the camera currently showing live images. Playback happens in the left-
hand frame, based on the camera whose live images are being displayed in the
right-hand frame.
Immediate "Manual" Recording: You can also begin a "manual" recording

immediately. This is useful when you see something suspicious from a live camera in
any location. If you're viewing a live image in either frame, and see something that you
need to record immediately, click the graphical Red Record button on the frame. This
immediately begins the recording, which you can play back later as recorded video. The
duration of the manual recording is set in the Manual Record Duration field of the
Video Administrator Settings tab. (The maximum limit for a manual record duration is
20 minutes.)

Video Controls
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 Beginning of File
2 Fast Reverse
3 Play Reverse
4 Frame Reverse
5 Stop
6 Frame Forward
7 Play
8 Fast Forward
9 End of File
Video Control Menu

The Video Monitor control menu allows you to assign and reassign cameras, view
live video, play recorded video, capture video images, adjust the image resolution,
adjust text font and color and perform other basic video operations.

Video Control Menu
Live Video
Select Live Video to display live (real time) images from the camera.
Note: This choice is available for both frames.
Note: Be sure to select Live Video again for any image that was previously frozen.
Recorded Video
Select Recorded Video to play back a camera's recorded video.
The default camera is the first one in the list of cameras associated with that point or
door.
To select another camera, select Camera Associations.
When you play back the recording for an alarm event, it plays for a predefined
duration established for that camera in the Pre-Record Time, Record Time, and Post-
Record Time fields in Video Administrator.
Note: This Recorded Video choice is not selectable from the right-hand frame's
dropdown menu or popup menu.
Note: Videos are stored on the video recorder, and not in the Continuum database.
Playback controls: Playback control buttons appear beneath the left-hand (recorded)
frame only. They do not appear beneath the right-hand (live) frame. These buttons
include Play buttons (forward and backward arrows) and a Stop button. Click a Play
button to begin the playback. You may also use the slider control within the frame to
move forward and backward in the recording. Other arrow buttons include fast
forward, fast reverse, one frame forward, one frame backward, jump to end, and jump
to beginning. (See also Video Control Frames.)
Record button for immediate manual recording: In either frame, click the red
record button to begin recording immediately. This is useful if you see something
suspicious in the live images. This immediate recording can be played back later.
The predefined manual duration is established in the Manual Record Duration field
on the Settings tab of the Video Administrator. The maximum duration allowed is 1
hour (3600 seconds).
Note: You cannot stop this immediate manual recording, once it starts. It must run
its duration.

Video Control Menu
Recorded Video cont…

Show video for last: To immediately play back a portion of the live video displayed
in the right-hand (live) frame, use the Show video for last dropdown menu to specify
how many minutes you want to play back for the camera displaying live video. When
you specify the number of minutes from the dropdown menu, the image immediately
plays back in the left-hand (recorded) frame, for the specified duration.
From the dropdown menu, select 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 60 minutes, or 24 hours.

Or select a custom time <custom>. If you select <custom> a popup box appears
where you can manually enter a Start date/time and an End date/time. If you select
one of the dropdown menu arrows in the Start and End fields, a calendar appears,
allowing you to select a particular date. Click OK to accept the dates/times.
Freeze Video
Select Freeze Video to freeze the camera image for this frame, for either a live or
recorded video.
Stop All Video

Select Stop All Video to freeze the moving images in both video control frames
immediately.
Note: Be sure to select Live Video to see running video again.
Clear Video
Select Clear Video to delete the camera image from a frame for either a live or
recorded video.

Video Control Menu
PTZ
Select PTZ when you need to pan, tilt, or zoom in and out of the video image in the
video control frame.
Note: The camera assigned to the video control frame must have PTZ capabilities in
order to use this feature.
When you pass your mouse cursor over the heads-up display (HUD) on the right side
of the frame (the vertical red box), the PTZ feature displays the following symbols:
 Click and hold to focus the camera "far" or further out.
 Click and hold to focus the camera "near" or further in.
 Click as needed to open the iris and increase the amount of light streaming
into the camera.
 Click and hold to close the iris and decrease the amount of light streaming into
the camera.
To zoom in and zoom out, place your mouse cursor over the red, center box of the
camera frame. Move your mouse cursor until a plus or minus symbol appears:
 Click and hold to zoom in.
 Click and hold to zoom out.
Panning and tilting — To pan and tilt the camera, place your cursor inside the video
control window, and click once. An arrow appears. You may pan/tilt up, down, left,
right, and diagonally. The blue arrow changes direction, according to where you place
it on the window:
 Up arrow — Pan up. Click cursor at top-center.
 Down arrow — Pan down. Click cursor at bottom-center.
 Left arrow — Pan left. Click cursor at left-center.
 Right arrow — Pan right. Click cursor at right-center.

Video Control Menu
PTZ cont…
 Right diagonal up arrow — Pan diagonally to the upper right. Click cursor
at top right corner.
 Left diagonal up arrow — Pan diagonally to the upper left. Click cursor at
top left corner.
 Right diagonal down arrow — Pan diagonally to the lower right. Click
cursor at bottom right corner.
 Left diagonal down arrow — Pan diagonally to the lower left. Click cursor
at bottom left corner.
The pan/tilt speed increases when you click and drag the arrow further away from the
vertical, center red box. To decrease the pan/tilt speed click and drag the arrow closer
to the vertical, center red box.
Show Brightness / Contrast Controls

Displays brightness and contrast controls. Use the arrow buttons to increase and
decrease brightness and contrast, respectively.
Brightness & Contrast Controls

Video Control Menu
Video Overlay
The Video Overlay attributes and buttons allows you to adjust your video control
images. From the video control menu, select Video Overlay. The Text Overlay
Controls dialog appears.
Items Tab
Click the Items tab to configure the text displayed for the camera, including the
date and time, over each video control frame of the matrix. The Text Overlay
Controls dialog displays, allowing selection of the type of text displayed, as well
font and color of the text. On the Items tab, click to insert or remove checks in
the checkboxes to enable or disable these text items.
Note: Item changes apply to all video control frames once they are accepted and
applied.
When Video Monitor is launched, on an alarm associated with the object,

preconfigured items are displayed.

Video Control Menu
Video Overlay cont…
Font Tab
On the Font tab, to change text font, enter the numerical Font Size, or select the
Font type (for example, Arial), respectively. In the Alignment section, to adjust
the text alignment, select the appropriate alignment button.

Video Control Menu
Video Overlay cont…
Color Tab
On the Color tab, to change text color, select the check box for Visible. Select
various shades of color and shadow by using the eye dropper tool and color
wheel. You can also adjust the hue and shading using the slider bars to the right
and on the bottom of the color wheel.

Video Control Menu
Capture Image
Select Capture Image to capture the image being displayed in this video control
window and to save it to a file.
The Capture Video Image Save dialog appears. Browse for the directory in which you
want to save the image file, specify the file name — the image only saves as a BMP
file type — and click Save.
Camera Associations
Select Camera Associations to select and view a pre-assigned camera to view in the
video control frame. The available cameras and their associated video server are
listed on this selection's submenu.

Video Monitor – Door Events, Door Status &
Person Events
Beneath the playback controls and the video images frames, the bottom of the Video
Monitor main screen displays special door and personnel information in the following
three tabs:
• Door Events
• Door Status
• Person Events
On these tabs, you can view a list of and perform a search on door events, check the
current status of the door — whether or not it is locked or enabled, the last valid and
invalid access attempts, and so on. You can also bring up a history of door events for a
specific person and see live video and recorded images from the door associated with a
specific event.
To enlarge the bottom portion of the Video Monitor, displaying more of these tabs, pass
your mouse over the double horizontal rule that spans the width of the entire Video
Monitor, until the double up-and-down arrow cursor appears. Click and drag upward.
Double Up & Down Arrow
Door Events / Door Status / Person Events

Person Events
Door Events
This tab displays a list of recent access events in a specified time frame for the door
associated with the selected event in the Active Video Events list at the top of the
Video Monitor. The name of the door appears at the top of the Door Events list.
Show events for last - Use this dropdown menu to specify a time period for
which only the events in that period are listed.
Time Stamp
Displays the date and time at which the event was triggered.
Type
Displays the type of event — a valid access, an invalid attempt, a door ajar, and
so on.
Message
Displays a text message describing the type of event.
Name
Displays the name of the person who accessed or attempted to access the door.
Note: You can sort the order of the list according to each column category. Simply
click the column heading by which you want to sort.

Person Events
Door Events cont…
Video & Events Column
For each door event, the Video column and Events column list a graphical button.
 Video: For the selected door event, click its Video button to see recorded
video images associated with that event at that door. The recording plays
back in the left-hand frame. Live video images at that door are displayed
in the right-hand frame.
Note: Not all events have video associated with them. For example,
video may not record on valid access attempts.
 Events: For the selected door event, click its Events button to populate
the Person Events tab with a list of all the events at that door by only the
person listed for this selected event in the Door Events tab. (See Person
Events, below.) The Person Events tab appears automatically after it
becomes populated.

Person Events
Door Status
For the door associated with the selected event in the Active Video Events list at the
top of the Video Monitor, this tab displays three types of information about the
current status of the door:
Door Attributes
 Value - Displays the door's current value as Locked or Unlocked.
 State - Displays the door's current state as Enabled or Disabled.
 Switch - Displays either Closed or Open, to indicate whether door is

physically closed or opened.
Last Valid Access

Displays the name of the person who last validly entered or exited this door, as
well as the date/time this person entered or exited.
Last Invalid Attempt

Displays the name of the person who last made an invalid attempt to enter or exit
this door, as well as the date/time this person made the attempt.

Person Events
Person Events
This tab lists all access events (valid and invalid) for a specific person. This tab
becomes populated when you click the Events button in the Events column for a
selected event in the Door Events tab. That is, it populates (and automatically
switches you to) this Person Events tab for the person named in the selected event in
the Door Events tab.
Video and Events Columns

For each person event on Person Events tab, the Video column and Events
column provide a graphical button, described below.
 Video: For the selected person event, click its Video button to see
recorded video images associated with that event at that door. The
recording plays back in the left-hand frame. Live video images at that
door are displayed in the right-hand frame.
 Events: For the selected person event, click its Events button to populate
the Door Events tab with a list of all the events at that door identified in
this selected event. (See Person Events, above.) The Door Events tab
appears automatically after it becomes populated.
Person Details
Click the Person Details button at the top of the list, next to the person's name, for
basic information on about that person. A small dialog, which looks like a
miniature Personnel Manager, appears. It displays this person's photo and data
from his/her personnel record.
Note: You must have proper authorization in order to review personnel data
associated with an event.

Introduction to VideoLayout
With the two object classes, VideoLayout and VideoServer along with other video
enhancements, Continuum allows for video integration within CyberStation.
VideoLayout
A VideoLayout object is essentially CyberStation’s video surveillance monitor,
through which live and/or recorded video is viewed. Each layout can display
video from up to nine cameras.
VideoServer
A VideoServer object identifies video servers for CyberStation, making it possible
for CyberStation to communicate with each video server and its cameras.
Note: VideoServer is covered in the Administration class.
Other Video Related Enhancements
 Various attributes for many object classes that have video associated with
them - for example, Graphics objects, Door objects and Points, such as
InfinityInput and BinaryInput.
 Active AlarmView features and Active EventView features that integrate

video with individual alarms and access events.

Introduction to VideoLayout
A "video layout" is essentially the video surveillance monitor for CyberStation. You
open a VideoLayout object either manually in Continuum Explorer, or automatically
by attaching it to a point's alarm or to a graphical control, to view live video images
from a single surveillance camera or from multiple cameras set up in a matrix of
video image frames.
Note: You may also open a video layout via the Plain English SHOW command, in
the Continuum Command Line or via a Plain English program.
Through the VideoLayout editor, you may also:
 Assign, delete, and reassign cameras in the layout
 Play back a recorded video clip
 Capture a video image and save it to a file
 Freeze, reload/refresh, pan, tilt, zoom, and adjust the image resolution
(contrast & brightness)
Each image window in the layout is called a video control frame. Using a multiple-
camera matrix, the VideoLayout editor allows you to assign and view the images of
one, two, three, four, six, or nine cameras.
Note: In order to assign a camera to a video control, at least one video server must
have been configured so that its cameras are available to the VideoLayout.
In Continuum Explorer, you create a VideoLayout object from:
 The Root directory
 A Folder
You can not create a VideoLayout object from:
 A Network
 A Controller
 A Workstation, or any other Device

Creating a VideoLayout
1. From the Root of Continuum, create a Folder and name it VideoFolder.
2. Right click on the VideoFolder and select New > VideoLayout.
3. Define an Object Name for the VideoLayout and then select the Create button.

The VideoLayout Editor
General Page

General Page
Matrix Selection
Select the desired video-control matrix to display one, two, three, four, six, or
nine video images in your layout. A video-control frame remains black until you
assign a camera.
Brightness / Contrast
Use the left and right arrow buttons to increase / decrease the brightness and
contrast.
Start / End Date & Time

The Start and End fields allow for selecting a recorded video segment for
playback.
1. Set the Start date (from a drop-down calendar) and the Start time of the
video segment.
2. Set the End date (from a drop-down calendar) and the End time of the
video segment.
3. Click on the Search button to retrieve the video segment for the cameras.
Choose the camera you want to view recorded video.

General Page
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Video Control Buttons

Click the Play button to begin the playback. Click the Stop button to stop
playback. You may also use the slider control within the frame to move forward
and backward in the recording.
From left to right the buttons are defined as:
1. Beginning of file
2. Fast reverse
3. Play reverse
4. Frame reverse
5. Stop
6. Frame forward
7. Play
8. Fast forward
9. End of file
Note: Videos are stored on the video server, and not in the Continuum database.
OSD (On Screen Display) Button

Click the OSD button to configure the text displayed for the camera, including the
date and time, over each video control frame of the matrix. The Text Overlay
Controls dialog displays allowing selection of the type of text displayed, as well
font and color of the text.
Items - Click to insert or remove checks in the checkboxes on the Items tab to
enable or disable these text items.

General Page
OSD (On Screen Display) Button cont…
Font - To change text font, enter the numerical Font Size, or select the Font type
(for example, Arial) respectively.
Color - To change text color, shadow, or background color select the check box
for Text Visible, Shadow Visible or Background Visible. Select various shades of
color and shadow by using the eye dropper tool and color wheel. You can also
adjust the hue and shading using the slider bars to the right and on the bottom of
the color wheel.

Menu Selections
Live Video
Select Live Video to display live (real time) images from the camera assigned
to this video control frame.
Recorded Video
Select Recorded Video to play back a video clip from the camera assigned to this
video control frame. When Recorded Video is selected, a list of camera names
queue up in the dropdown menu, located to the right of the Search button. The
first camera name appears in the dropdown menu field, by default. Select the
appropriate camera name that you wish to view.
After you select Recorded Video from the popup menu, the dates and times
default to two hours before the VideoLayout was opened in the Start field and the
exact time the layout was opened in the End field.
Freeze Video
Select Freeze Video to freeze the camera image for a frame for either a live or
recorded video.
Delete Camera Assignment

Select Delete Camera Assignment to remove the camera from the video control
frame. When you delete a camera assignment, the camera images disappear and
the frame goes black.

Menu Selections cont…
PTZ (Pan / Tilt / Zoom)

Select PTZ when you need to pan, tilt, or zoom in and out of the video image in
the video control frame.
The camera assigned to the video control frame must have PTZ capabilities in
order to use this feature.
When you pass your mouse cursor over the vertical red box on the right side of
the frame, the PTZ feature displays the following symbols:
Click and hold to focus the camera "far" or further out.
Click and hold to focus the camera "near" or further in.
Click as needed to open the iris and increase the amount of light streaming
into the camera.
Click and hold to close the iris and decrease the amount of light streaming
into the camera.
To zoom in and zoom out, place your mouse cursor over the red, center box of the
camera frame. Move your mouse cursor until a plus or minus symbol appears:
+ Click and hold to zoom in.

_ Click and hold to zoom out.
To pan and tilt the camera, place your cursor inside the video control frame, until
an arrow appears. You may pan/tilt up, down, left, right, and diagonally. The
arrow changes direction, according to where you place it on the frame:
 Up arrow - Pan up. Click the cursor at the top-center.
 Down arrow - Pan down. Click the cursor at the bottom-center.
 Left arrow - Pan left. Click the cursor at the left-center.
 Right arrow - Pan right. Click the cursor at the right-center.
 Right diagonal up arrow - Pan diagonally to the upper right. Click the
cursor at top right corner.

Menu Selections
PTZ (Pan / Tilt / Zoom) cont…
 Left diagonal up arrow - Pan diagonally to the upper left. Click the
cursor at the top left corner.
 Right diagonal down arrow - Pan diagonally to the lower right. Click the
cursor at the bottom right corner.
 Left diagonal down arrow - Pan diagonally to the lower left. Click the
cursor at the bottom left corner.
The pan/tilt speed increases when you click and drag the arrow further away from
the vertical, center red box. To decrease the pan/tilt speed click and drag the
arrow closer to the vertical, center red box.
At the bottom of the camera frame, a scrolling menu and a Go button are
displayed. This menu contains the numbers 1 - 6 associated with each preset
camera view. Select the Go button to switch to the camera view associated with
preset number.
Note: Although some cameras support multiple camera presets, only six are
supported in this menu.
Stop all Video

Select Stop All Video to freeze the moving image of this video control frame
immediately.
Capture Image
Select Capture Image to capture the image being displayed in this video control
frame and to save it to a file.
The Capture Video Image Save dialog appears. Browse for the directory in which
you want to save the image file, specify the file name, (the image only saves as a
.BMP file type),and click Save.

Menu Selections cont…
Video Points
Select Video Points to preconfigure a video control frame so that, when this
VideoLayout is attached to an object and associated with an alarm, up to four
cameras (known as "video points") can be automatically associated with the
VideoLayout.
When the alarm goes off, this VideoLayout is launched, displaying the video
points associated with the object that went into the alarm mode.
These cameras are pre-assigned via the Video Points button (and the Video Points
dialog) in the Alarms tab or Advanced Alarms tab of the AnalogInput,
AnalogValue, BinaryInput, BinaryValue, Door, InfinityInput, InfinityNumeric,
InfinitySystemVariable, MultistateInput, or MultistateValue editor.
Using the Video Points dialog in these editors, you designate between one and
four video points, whereby each numbered "video point" represents a frame in the
VideoLayout's matrix
 About the Video Points Dialog – Click the Video Points button on the
Alarms or Advanced Alarms tab of the editors listed above to bring up the
Video Points dialog.
 In this Video Points dialog, you may also configure a camera to record a
video clip, for specified number of seconds, when the alarm goes off.
 Video Servers - Use the Video Servers dropdown menu to select a video
server on which the camera is located. (A VideoServer object must be
already configured and the server online).

Menu Selections
Video Points cont…
 Cameras - Use the Cameras dropdown menu to select a camera for the
numbered video point. (The camera must be configured and enabled on
the selected video server.)
 Rec - Check the Rec. checkbox to record a video clip from the selected
camera. Recording begins at the moment the alarm goes off.
 Duration - In the Duration field, use the up and down arrows to select the
number of seconds to record a video clip, once you check the Rec.
checkbox.
 PTZ - In the PTZ field, select the number of the preset camera view. (This
camera must have PTZ (pan, tilt, zoom) capabilities in order to use this
feature.)
After you pre-assign the video point cameras to the frames, you reference a video
point number here (in the General tab of the VideoLayout editor) that corresponds
with each numbered frame you configured in the Video Points dialog. Right click
over the frame, select Video Points, then select 1, 2, 3, or 4. For example, the
camera you specified as "Video point 1" in the object editor is assigned to the
frame you reference as "1" in this VideoLayout object.
Video Servers
Select Video Servers to assign or reassign a camera or "video source" to this
video control frame.
Select the appropriate server name and then in the next popup menu, select the
name of a camera — for example, it might be called "main lobby" or "loading
dock" — belonging to that server. The camera is assigned to the video control,
and the camera's images immediately appear in its frame.
In order to assign a camera to a video control, at least one video server must have
been configured.
Note: Access to video servers may be restricted by Continuum's security system.

Access to cameras on the video server may be restricted by the server's security
system. Users see only the cameras to which they have been granted access.

Ch 17 ListViews
Chapter Contents
 What is a ListView
 Opening ListViews
 ListView Features
 Working with ListViews
 Printing ListViews
 Creating a ListView
 ListView Editor
17-2 ListViews
What is a ListView
A Listview is a Continuum object that displays a list of attribute values about a
specific object class. Listview attribute values are retrieved either live from the
controller or from the Continuum database.
The information displayed in a Listview depends on how the ListView had been
configured and whether or not qualifiers have been established to filter objects by
specified criteria.
Examples of ListViews
For Access Control For HVAC
 All Personnel  All Temperature Inputs

 All Doors  All Relative Humidity Points
 All Motion Detectors  All Disabled Inputs
 Visitors with Cards  All Disabled Outputs
 All Personnel with Disabled Cards  Comm. Status of Controllers

What is a ListView
Terms often used in Continuum
The following is a list of words that are frequently used when discussing
ListViews.
 Object
An object is an element within the Continuum environment representing
physical and software items. Physical objects include controllers, I/O
modules, workstations. Software items include schedules, reports, groups,
listviews, graphics, etc…
 Attribute
An attribute is the property or characteristic of an object. For example,
personnel attributes include name, department, and card number.
 Class
Objects are grouped into classes based on similar attributes. Typical
classes include doors, personnel records, inputs, outputs, schedules and
graphics.
17-4 ListViews
Opening ListViews
As an Operator, opening a ListView is performed from a menu page.
From the System & Status menu page, point and click on the Infinity Inputs button to
retrieve the ListViews Page.
Opens a ListView displaying all Infinity Inputs

ListView Features
Title Bar
The Title Bar displays the ListView name that describes the contents of the list (i.e.,
Infinity Inputs.)
Pull-Down Menus
Selecting options from the pull-down menus is one way to perform the ListView
functions discussed throughout this chapter.
Object Menu:
The Object Menu provides options related to printing, deleting all objects from
the list, and closing the ListView window.
Note: An Operator may not be granted sufficient privileges to perform the Delete
All function.
17-6 ListViews
ListView Features
Pull-Down Menus cont…
Edit Menu:
The Edit menu provides options for copying selected objects, selecting all objects
in the list, and setting the attributes for a selected object.
View Menu:
The View menu provides options for displaying the Toolbar and Status Bar,
refreshing the ListView or object information, generating an HTML report (if one
is configured for the ListView), and editing the configuration parameters for the
ListView (if granted editing privileges).
Quick Picks Toolbar

The quick pick icons provides an easy way for:
Print the ListView to the Windows NT default printer
Copy the selected object(s)
Refresh the list with current values
Refresh the ListView object
Generate and display an HTML report
Edit the ListView configuration
Access the on-line Help system

Working with ListViews
Objects and Attributes
A ListView consists of rows and columns of information pertaining to the items in the
list. The rows contain the Objects within the control system, which match the
ListView criteria. Columns contain descriptive information and values for the
associated object (referred to as Attributes). Attribute data is specific to a ListView.
Thus, the contents of columns change from one ListView to another.
Scroll Bars
If a ListView contains many rows and columns of information, which do not all fit in
the window, use the horizontal and vertical scroll bars to view the additional
information.
Total Objects Retrieved

A box appears in the lower right corner of the ListView indicating the total number of
objects contained in the list. When a ListView first opens, the message “Building
List, please wait” appears in this area.
Note: If the ListView contains many objects, it may take awhile before the list is
compiled and the data is displayed. Do not click on the ListView button
repeatedly since a ListView for every click will be loaded.
Highlighted Objects
Some ListViews use colors to visually draw your attention to objects that may require
evaluation. For example, the All Temperature Inputs ListView (shown below) has
two objects highlighted in yellow. They are highlighted because their values are less
than zero indicating a problem may exist with the temperature sensors.
17-8 ListViews
Prompted ListViews
The ListViews we have looked at so far retrieve objects based upon the requirements
specified in the ListView configuration (as defined by your Continuum
Administrator). Some ListViews, however, prompt a user to enter search criteria
before compiling the ListView.
Prompted ListViews are frequently used in Access Control environments to allow

Operators to search for personnel by last name, department, card number, etc. When
retrieving one of these types of ListViews, a dialog box first appears prompting to
enter the search criteria. For example, the following figure shows the prompt when
searching personnel by last name.
When searching, the prompt box always contains an asterisk (*) character. The
asterisk is known as a wildcard and is used to simplify the search process. An
asterisk matches any number of characters. It can be used as the first or last character
in the search string.
Note: A wildcard is a placeholder for other characters when specifying a value and
the Operator only knows part of it or wants to find more than one value that may
match a certain pattern.
The best way to describe the use of a wildcard is through examples, as provided
below.
 If searching for last names and only entered the asterisk in the prompt box, all
the personnel records in your database would be retrieved.
 If wanting to retrieve all personnel whose last names begin with the letter “S,”
enter S* in the box.
 If wanting to retrieve all personnel whose last names end with the letters
“LY”, enter *LY in the box.

Editing Objects
From a ListView, a user can edit an object. There are 3 methods for editing objects
within a ListView.
Method 1
Double-click on the object name to open the Object Editor window for the item.
Method 2
Right-click on the object name to retrieve a pop-up menu. Select the Edit option,
which opens the Object Editor window allowing to make the required changes.
Refer to the following table for a description of the pop-up menus.
Open
Open displays the Editor window for the selected item allowing to view it’s
properties.
Edit
Edit displays the Editor window for the selected item, allowing changes to the
item properties.
Enable and Disable

Enable and Disable change the current state of the selected item. When
enabled, an input is automatically updated by the system and reflects the
current value of the attached object. For an output or numeric, enabled allows
programs to control the point.
View
View provides the ability to retrieve the History or Graph for the item.
Send To
Send To is used to send the selected item’s information to the controller, a text
file, or printer.
Delete
Delete provides the option to delete the selected item’s record from the
database. This option should be used with extreme care since there is no
method for restoring information that has been deleted.
Rename
Rename allows the user to change the alias name of the selected item.
Properties
Properties opens a tabbed window displaying system information for the
selected item.
17-10 ListViews
Editing Objects
Method 3
Some object attributes can be changed directly within the ListView window.
Double-click on the attribute to change and a cursor will appear in the box where
the pointer was located (if it can be modified in this manner.) Enter the new value
and press the Enter key to make the change.
Refreshing the ListView

While reviewing ListView information, it is necessary to refresh the list from time to
time to retrieve the most current database information and update the display to
reflect any changes you may have made to objects. Two quick pick icons are
available to perform refresh functions.
Refresh List: Click on this quick pick icon to update the ListView when
values are not dynamically updating.
Refresh List View Object: Click on this quick pick icon to update the
ListView when changes have been made to the configuration of the ListView
(administrators only).

Printing ListViews
Clicking on the Print quick pick icon sends a report to the locally connected
printer (the Windows NT default). The report uses default settings to print a report.
Changing Print Settings

Three print format options are available, allowing to modify the printed report
settings through the Object pull-down menu.
 Page Setup
 Print Setup
 Header/Footer
Page Setup
The Page Setup option is used to modify the page format defaults such as
margins. When selecting this option, the following dialog box appears.
Most of the items allow the option to select or deselect the format settings such as
whether the headers for rows and columns will be printed on every page.
 To change the current setting, click on the radio button or box to the left of
the item.
 To change the margin settings, click in the box and type in the new value
in inches.
 The Preview area shows an example of how the report will look when it is
printed with the current settings.
17-12 ListViews
Printing ListViews
Changing Print Settings cont…
Print Setup
The Print Setup dialog box lets the user modify the properties of the default
printer or select a different printer if more than one printer is available.
Note: Since the Print Setup dialog box is a Windows NT function; refer to the
Windows NT and printer documentation for more information about changing
these parameters.
Header / Footer
Use the Header/Footer option to specify items to be printed on the top and bottom
of every page of the report. For example, specify a report title to be printed as the
header and the page number and date to be printed as the footer.

Printing ListViews
Changing Print Settings
Header / Footer cont…

To enter the Header and Footer information, click on the header or Footer tab and
then enter the text in the left aligned, centered, and/or right aligned boxes based
on where the text is to appear.
If there is more than one row of footer information, move to the next row and
enter the text in the appropriate left, centered, and/or right aligned column.
Note: For the Header and Footer, the following codes are available for the easy
insertion of page numbers, date, and total number of pages.
Code Description
$P Inserts the page number

$N Inserts the total number of pages
$D Inserts the date
Note: You can use these codes along with text to
customize your printed report
To change the Font, click on the Font button. A dialog box similar to the one
shown below displays.
Make font choices from the items listed, which correspond to your selected
printer’s capabilities.
After making the required changes, click on the OK button to return to the
Header/Footer dialog box.
17-14 ListViews
Printing ListViews
Printing an HTML Report
Clicking on the View Report quick pick icon generates an HTML report, which
is displayed through a web browser. From the web browser, a user can print the
HTML report, send it to someone using email, change the format and save it to a file.
Note: Refer to the web browser's documentation for specific information on the
available functions and capabilities of the application.
Two important items of note regarding HTML reports are:
 The HTML report is only a valid option if the Continuum Administrator has
associated a HTML template with the ListView. Otherwise, when clicking on
the icon, a dialog box will appear with the message “Nothing to do. HTML
template file not defined.
 HTML reports contain information captured from the ListView at the moment
the icon was selected. The values do not continue to update in the HTML
report. To retrieve a new set of values, return to the Continuum ListView and
generate another HTML report.
An HTML Report generated from a Disabled Inputs ListView

Creating a ListView
1 From the desired location, right click and select New and then ListView.
2. Enter an Object Name for the ListView and then select Create.
For organizational purposes, consider creating a ListView folder and then create the
ListViews from that folder.
17-16 ListViews
ListView Editor
General Page
Description:
Enter a description of up to 32 characters (including spaces) to describe the
listView.
Class:
Select an object class from the dropdown menu. The ListView will display only
the objects it finds from this class.
Filter:
Select a filter for the ListView. There are pre-defined system filters available and
Continuum administrators can configure user-defined filters.
Filters are time-based objects that narrow the search for the four Event class
objects: Activity, Access, Alarm and Error.
Prompt for filter:

When selected, prompts the user to browse for and select a filter for this instance
of the Listview.

ListView Editor
Path Type:
Select the type of path to use when looking for objects.
The Path Type tells Continuum where to look for objects of this class - for
example, programs on a particular controller or InfinityOutput points stored in a
certain folder. Selections include:
AllPaths - Searches all possible paths on a system
FolderOnly - Searches the folder in the Path field
FolderandBelow - Searches the folder in the Path field and all its subfolders
DeviceOnly - Searches the device in the Path field
DeviceandBelow - Searches the device in the Path field all the objects
attached (owned by) the device
Prompt - Displays a dialog box that asks users for the ListView path
ClassDefault - Designates this ListView as the default view for the class
selected from the Class pull-down list
Path:
Browse for and select the device or folder to insert in Path.
Report Template:
To view the data within the ListView in an HTML report, select an HTML report
template file to use.
17-18 ListViews
ListView Editor
Options:
Check one of these two checkboxes to select a display option:
Show Grid Lines - Use this option for the ListView to contain row and
column markings.
Live Data on Open - Use this option to make the ListView open and poll for
live attributes before displaying any data in the listview.
Live Data Refresh Rate - If a ListView contains live data, enter the Live
Data Refresh Rate in seconds. Continuum refreshes only the ListView's live
attributes using the interval specify here.
List Reload Rate - To make a ListView refresh or "reload," enter a rate in

seconds. The reload rate is a refresh interval for rebuilding the entire list. The
default is 0. Time is measured from the moment the list finishes loading. For
example, if you set the reload rate to 30 seconds, then the list will reload 30
seconds after it finishes loading, not 30 seconds from when it starts loading.
Run Listview:
To run the ListView, select the Apply button and then the Run ListView button.
The new ListView appears.

ListView Editor
Columns Page
Add Column:
Select this button for each column displayed in a ListView.
Remove Column:
Use this button to remove a selected column.
To select a column, select its topmost row
17-20 ListViews
ListView Editor
Columns Page
Attribute:
Select an attribute such as Name or Status from the dropdown menu.
Heading:
To use a different heading, type over the attribute Name. By default, the ListView
uses the attribute's Name as a Heading.
Edit:
Check this checkbox to let users edit the attribute from the ListView. Clear to
disallow editing.
Not all attributes are editable and are determined by the Attribute setting.
Font / Heading Font:

Each ListView column can display specific fonts for the column data and the
column heading.

ListView Editor
Columns Page cont…
Justification:
Justifies the position of the text displayed in the ListView to the left, center or
right side of the column.
Source:
Defines whether the attribute is retrieved from the database or polled live from the
controller.
Not all source options are editable and are determined by the Attribute selection.
Sort:
Use this feature to sort certain data attributes in the ListView according to their
values. Use up to 3 attributes for sorting objects in the ListView. The sort can be
either in ascending or descending order.
17-22 ListViews
ListView Editor
Columns Page cont…
Width:
The width can be set by either entering a number (in pixels) or by dragging the
right side of a column to the desired width.
Place the cursor on the right side

of the column and while holding
down the mouse button, drag to
the desired width.
Show:
Check the Show checkbox to include this column in the ListView.
Background Color:
Select a color to distinguish columns displayed in the ListView.

ListView Editor
Qualifiers Page
A Qualifier is a statement that references attributes and values. A Qualifier is used to
determine which objects appear in the ListView. There are 3 separate Qualifiers:
Database - The first to be applied and runs on database values of attributes.
Live - Polls the controller for attribute values in qualifier and runs second only on
the result of a live qualifier.
Highlight - Applies highlight color to live attributes in highlight qualifier only on

result of database and live qualifiers.
The Qualifiers page is for entering qualifiers and setting highlight colors that will be
displayed in the ListView depending on attribute values.
Advanced Database Qualifier:

Check this checkbox to create qualifying statements in the Database text window,
instead of the Query Wizard. The Query Wizard button is disabled when this is
checked.
Database:
Enter a statement that accesses attribute values in the Continuum database.
Use database qualifiers to narrow a database search to cut down on search times.
Enter one or more Plain English statements that will qualify objects based on the
value of specific attributes.
When including a ListView attribute that is not dynamic, such as Name, the
system retrieves the information faster from the database than from the
controllers.
17-24 ListViews
ListView Editor
Qualifiers Page
Database: cont…
HVAC Samples:
ElecType is Digital
Units = "%Open"
To keep template objects from appearing in a list, use the following qualifier:
Template is False
Security Samples:
Lastname is like prompt ("Please Enter Lastname", "*") and template =

false
Lastname is like prompt ("Please Enter Lastname:, "*") and Firstname is

like prompt ("Please Enter Firstname", "*") and template = false
Cardnumber = strtonum(prompt("Please Enter Cardnumber","")
Advanced Live Qualifier:

Check this checkbox to create qualifying statements in the Live text window,
checked.
Live:
Enter statements that access live attribute values.
Enter one or more Plain English statements that qualify objects based on the value
of specific attributes.
Some examples are:
State = Disabled or Override = True
Value > 78

ListView Editor
Qualifiers Page cont…
Advanced Highlight Qualifier:
Check this checkbox to create qualifying statements in the Highlight text window,
checked.
Highlight:
Enter statements to highlight certain objects based on a certain attribute value.
Enter Plain English statements that highlight objects based on the value of
specific attributes. This is especially useful if you have a Live or Database
qualifier statement like the following:
State = Disabled or Override = True
To highlight only those objects with an Override value of TRUE, enter the
following statement:
Override = True
Highlight Color:
Defines the Text and Background color of highlighted objects.
17-26 ListViews
ListView Editor
Query Wizard:
The Query Wizard assists in building a qualifier statement.
The Attribute options are dependent upon which class of object was selected on
the General page.
Attribute Operator
Prompt:
Select the Prompt checkbox to be prompted for an alternate attribute value when
the Listview appears.
The Prompt feature is only available for a Database qualifier. It is not available
for object link attributes, such as owner ID or device ID.

ListView Editor
Query Wizard: cont…
Once the statement is built, it is returned from the Query Wizard to the
appropriate text window in the Qualifiers page.
If necessary, the statement can be edited by checking the appropriate Advanced

Qualifier checkbox, for Database, Live, or Highlight.
17-28 ListViews
Ch 18 Groups
Chapter Contents
 What is a Group
 Opening a Group
 Group Features
 Editing an Object
 Viewing the Group History
 History View Features
 Viewing the History of a Single Object
 Creating a Group
 Group Editor
 Changing Pen Properties
18-2 Groups
What is a Group
Groups are collections of objects put together in a convenient way to organize and
view information that is somehow related, as defined by specific needs. For example,
grouping all of your fan points for a building or all of the points for a VAV box.
Although ListViews also provide a way to view information about points, ListViews
are limited to points within one object class. Members of a group can come from
different object classes such as inputs, outputs, numerics, etc.
When viewing information about groups, the current values associated with the points
in a group are presented, as well as historical information. To collect historical data,
automatic logs need to be configured for the points (configured by the Continuum
Administrator).
The history and graphical views provide valuable information about group member
activities over a specified time period, which can be easily printed or saved to a file
for management reporting.
Group

What is a Group
Three Different Views
Member list view - The member list displays the name, class, and value of every
object in the member list. For groups that consist entirely of personnel objects,
the member list displays the last name, first name, and middle initial of the
person, the last known location of the person, and personnel object name.
Graph view - View a graph of the selected member list objects. The graph plots
logged values.
History view - The history displays a list of all the selected member list objects,
along with their logged values over a particular period.
18-4 Groups
Opening a Group
1. From the Main menu, select the Groups button to access the Groups ListView.
Groups Menu Selection
2. The Groups ListView is displayed. Double click on a specific Group to open its
Member List.

Group Features
When a Group View opens, the Log Viewer application displays the Group Member
List. The Member List shows the objects associated with the group and their current
values and settings.
Member List for the CX9900 Group
Title Bar
The Title Bar lists the Group name and indicates what view is currently displayed.
Menu Bar
Selecting options from the pull-down menus is one way for performing the group
functions.
Object Menu
The Object Menu provides administrative options to edit the parent object for the
group and to save the group.
18-6 Groups
Group Features
Menu Bar cont…
View Menu
The View menu provides the ability to select between the member list, the history
or graph views. The toolbar and status bar can also be displayed or hidden. If
one of the objects in the Member List is selected, then the option Member
Properties is also available from this menu.
Window Menu
The Window Menu provides options for managing open windows. From this
menu, choose between the arrangement options (Cascade, Tile, Arrange Icons)
and see a list of currently open windows, to choose from.

Group Features
Quick Picks Toolbar
Clicking on the quick pick icons provides an easy way to:
Edit the parent object for the Group or selected member list object
Save the changes to the Group
Print the Member List
View the Member List
View History information for the Group (or selected Member List object(s))
View Graph of History information
Access the on-line Help system
Refresh Icon
Object and Attributes

A Member List consists of rows and columns of information pertaining to the items in
the Group. The rows list the Objects contained in the group. The columns list
Attribute information for each of the objects.
Select/Deselect Boxes
Boxes with or without check marks in them are displayed to the left of each object.
These boxes are referred to as the Select/Deselect Boxes. They are used to indicate
whether an object in the group should be included when History and Graph functions
are performed.
Scroll Bars
Scroll bars become active when the Group you are viewing includes lots of objects
and attributes.
18-8 Groups
Group Features
Menu Options
From the Member List, the user can perform functions associated with the objects in
the group. When right-clicking on an object, a pop-up menu appears.
Open and Edit

Launches the Editor application for the selected object. The Edit option is the
recommended function to use.
Note: The Open and Edit options can be a bit confusing. Depending on the
Continuum application that's running (Schedules, ListViews, Groups, Graphics,
etc.), they may perform different or the same function. In some cases, choosing
Open allows for only viewing the object. Other times, the Open option allows for
editing the object.
Enable and Disable

Places the object into or out of system control.
View
Provides the option to retrieve the History or Graph for the selected object
Send to
Sends the object information to the controller, a database, a text file, or the
printer.
Delete
Removes the selected object from the Group.

Group Features
Menu Options cont…
Rename
Allows a user to change the name and alias for the object.
Page Setup
Provides access to the settings for how group information prints.
Note: The Page Setup and Print Selected options require a default printer to be
configured within Windows NT. Ask the Continuum Administrator for assistance
if a printer is not already defined. This also applies to the quick pick Print icon.
Print Selected
Sends the information for the object to the printer.
Remove Members
Removes the selected object from the group.
Member Properties
Opens a dialog box allowing to change settings for how the object data will be
displayed in a Graph view. Specifically, a user will be able to change top and
bottom range values and the steps between the ranges. The units and format for
the object are also displayed in the dialog box.
Properties
Provides descriptive information about the object such as name, alias, device,
current status, and history.
18-10 Groups
Editing an Object
If using the Group function to monitor the activity of objects, at times you may want
to edit the object in response to a problem situation.
Right-clicking on the SpaceTemp object and selecting the Edit option opens the
Object Editor window.
Once the necessary changes have been made, click on the OK button to return to the
Member List.
In order to update the display to reflect the changes, close the window and re-open the
Group by clicking on its button on the Menu Page.

Viewing the Group History
The History function displays a tabular list of all the points in the group and the
values logged for them over a specified time period. These values are displayed in
table format.
The data presented in the History View is retrieved from the information recorded via
the automatic logs configured for the objects (as configured by your Continuum
Administrator). If a point does not have an automatic log defined, no values will
appear in the History View.
To generate a History view, click on this icon from the Quick Pick Toolbar. A
Range dialog box appears allowing the user to specify the dates, times, and value
intervals for the history view.
Time Range for History

Range
The Start and End Dates reflect the default of the current day.
To change the Start or End Date, click on the down arrow next to the current
value to select new dates from the pull-down menu or type in a new value by
clicking on the field and entering a new value (make sure to enter it in the same
format mm/dd/yyyy).
The Start and End Times reflect the default of one hour from the present time.
To change the Start or End Times, click on the up or down arrows next to the
current value to increase or decrease the current time or type in a new value in
each field by clicking on the time element (i.e., hour, minute, second) and
entering a new value. Use the TAB key to move between the time elements.
Time Between Rows

The Time Between Rows reflects that the object values will be displayed every
one minute.
To change the Time Between Rows, click in the appropriate field (hours, minutes,
or seconds) and enter the new value. Enter values in each field to attain the time
interval you desire.
18-12 Groups
Viewing the Group History
Time Range for History
Log Type
If both log types have been configured for the group, then choose between the CX
or the Extended. Click on the radio button to the left of the desired log type.
Now Button
Sets the End Date and End Time to the current date and time.
OK Button
When all the necessary Range changes have been made, click on the OK button
to proceed to the History View based upon the settings.

History View Features
The History View below shows the values logged for the CX9900 Group on
02/25/2002 from 09:14:00 AM to 10:14:00 AM. The list descends backwards in
increments of 30 seconds (the time between rows setting.)
Note: In a History View, the rows correspond to the time intervals for the values.
The columns display the members of the Group and their values.
18-14 Groups
Fill Options
Four quick pick icons are available in the History View. They provide the following
fill options for the time increments when a value has not been recorded in the log.
The No Fill option only displays the logged values (as shown in the figure
above.
The Repeat Fill option repeats the most recent logged value between time
increments.
The Slope Fill option displays gradations of sloping values calculated between
the time increments.
The Dim Fill option is a toggle button controlling the appearance of the Fill
values. When it is in the Dim mode, the values appear in gray. In the non-Dim
mode, they appear in black.
Repeat and Dim Fill

An example of a history view with the Repeat and Dim Fill options selected.
Notice some values appear in gray since they are the repeated values shown in
Dim mode.

Fill Options cont…
Slope Fill without Dim Fill
The figure below shows an example of the Slope Fill option without the Dim
option selected. Notice the values are now calculated between the actual logged
values rather than repeated.
Note: Remember to click on the Print quick pick icon to print out a history view.
A printout may help to assist a Technician with troubleshooting a problem or to
fine tune the performance of a particular point.
18-16 Groups
Viewing the History of a Single Object
Sometimes it's necessary to look at the history for a particular object or objects. Two
options for accomplishing this exist and both are performed from the Member List.
Using the Selection Boxes

This selection boxes indicate which object(s) to include in the History View. For
example, if only wanting to retrieve the history information for the RmSetPoint object
in the CX9900 Group, then the Member List would look like this:
Using the Drop Down Menu

Right click on the object to retrieve the pop-up menu. From the menu, select the
View > History option as shown below:

Viewing the History of a Single Object
When performed either option, the Range dialog box opens allowing to specify the
time period and time increments. Make any required changes and click on the OK
button to retrieve the History view.
The list for the object(s) will be displayed based upon the range settings (similar to
the list below.)
18-18 Groups
Creating a Group
1. From the appropriate controller, right click and select New and then Group.
2. Enter an Object Name for the Group and then select Create.

Group Editor
General Page
Description:
Enter text that will be the title of the graph and history of the group.
Default View:
Select the view of the Group that will appear when opening the group object.
Default Time Range:

Enter the Days, Hours, or Minutes to specify what period of time the group
graph or history will sample values.
Member List Refresh Rate:

Enter the interval in seconds at which the system is to update values for the group.
This is the polling rate.
The default setting of zero (0) means there will be no live update of the points
when displayed in the log viewer.
Personnel Only Member List:

Not implemented.
18-20 Groups
Group Editor
Member List Page
The Member List page displays a list of members and is where objects are added
and removed from the group.
Add:
Use this button to add members to the list.
Objects can also be added to the Member List from the Explorer by using the drag
and drop technique.
Remove:
Use this button to remove highlighted objects from the Member List

Group Editor
Graph Page
The Graph page is where the parameters of the graph are set. From this page,
configure the scale that will be used to plot values for the selected objects in the
member list.
Only the objects with automatic logs will be graphed.
Scale of Vertical Axis:
Singular Scale - Use this scale if all points use the same unit type or if all
points have the same engineering units.
Multiple Scale - Use this scale when a group of objects have different unit
attributes or if points have different engineering units.
Right click on the object in the Member List and select Member Properties.
Set the Top and Bottom values for the object. Do this for each object in the
Member List.
18-22 Groups
Group Editor
Graph Page
Scale of Vertical Axis:
Vertical Axis Scale:

Displays a range for the point values in the member list, according to values
defined in the fields Top, Bottom, and Units.
This is only used if using a singular scale.
Top - Enter the number that will show on the graph view as top of scale.
Bottom - Enter the number that will show on the graph view as bottom of
scale
Units - Enter the unit text that will show as the label for the vertical axis.

Group Editor
History Page
Display History Values:

Displays two types of values: Actual and Fill.
Actual values are taken from automatic logs at the intervals defined for each log.
Fill values occur at the interval defined by the Time Between Rows setting.
Filling Type:
Select the option for filling in values between the logged values on the history
chart.
None - This option displays only the values taken at each log interval.
Repeat Values Until Change - This option repeats the last interval until the
point value changes.
18-24 Groups
Group Editor
History Page
Filling Type: cont…
Slope Between Values - This option displays gradations of values between

the rows. Gradation calculations are based on the difference between row
values and the number of refresh rate values between rows.
Time Between Rows:

Enter the Hours, Minutes, or Seconds that will be the interval between rows of
values on the history chart.
Dim Fill Values:

Places a gray shade over the fill values between logged values on the history
chart.

Changing Pen Properties
When viewing a graph, it is possible to change the display of a points tracking pen.
While in Graph view, Right click on the appropriate Pen who's properties are to be
changed and select Pen Properties…
The Pen Properties Editor window opens.
Pen Color:
Click this button to select a color for the pen – that is, the color of the data points
and the style of the lines that connect them.
18-26 Groups
Changing Pen Properties
Style:
From the Style dropdown menu, select a style for showing how the pen (and its
trend of plotted data points) is displayed on the graph. For example – a trend line,
bar chart, etc. The menu provides the following choices.
Data Point Style:

From the Data Point Style dropdown menu, select a style for marking a data
point itself. The menu provides the following choices:
Hide This Pen:

Use this option to hide a pen from the graph. The pen continues to record data
from its source data object, but does not plot data on the graph. A gray screen
covers the pen itself in the pen labels area. For example, the pen on the left is
hidden.
Hidden Pen Active Pen

18-28 Groups
Ch 19 Reports
Chapter Contents
 What are Reports
 Creating a Report
 Report Editor
 Sample Reports
19-2 Reports
What are Reports
CyberStation provides a graphical suite of features, called Reports, that allows you to
gather, view, compare, and distribute point-object data values, locally or remotely,
manually or automatically, from virtually anywhere in your Continuum system.
Using CyberStation Reports, you may collect and filter data from a multiple number
of dynamic building-control data sources (including extended logs) then instantly
display this data in graphical bar charts, pie charts, trend charts, or columned text
charts.
With reports, you can:
 Display report data using one of several data formats
 Display two or more reports simultaneously
 Modify report configurations on the fly while viewing them
 Schedule reports to run automatically at a specified time
 Save a report to a file, manually and/or automatically
 Email a report, manually and/or automatically
 Print a report

Creating a Report
In Continuum Explorer, right click on a folder or device, and select New, then
Report, from the popup menu.
From the New dialog, specify a Name for the Report and select the Create button.
19-4 Reports
Report Editor
Configure the Report object, using the Source, Filter, and Output pages of the
Report editor.
Source Page
Description:
The description can be up to 32 characters including spaces to describe the report.
The description can be viewed from the Report Viewer.
Data Source:
From the dropdown menu, select the source of data, on which you want to report.
There are 7 options to choose from:
Current Value: This is a snapshot of the current value of an object at any

given time. This includes any object that has a value.
Extended Log: This is a collection of additional point values, uploaded from

a log on a controller to a workstation's Continuum database. It is an extension
of a "local" log, whose values are stored on a point's controller. Typically,
Extended-log is selected for LAN controllers.

Report Editor
Source Page
Data Source: Cont…
Refreshed-Extended Log: The extended-log values are updated or

"refreshed" immediately, uploaded from the controller to the workstation's
database before they appear in the report. Use this data source when you want
to see the most "up-to-the-minute" extended log entries, not the entries based
on the last specified update interval. Typically, this is used for remote (RAS)
controllers, which require dial-up access for database uploads.
Access Event: This is data associated with valid or invalid attempts of

persons accessing doors and areas. There are 22 available types of access-
event data from which to choose. For example, you can see "most accessed
doors" or "active alarms under a networks".
Alarm Event: Displays data retrieved from the AlarmEvent log in the
Continuum database. There are 22 available types of alarm data from which to
choose. For example, you can see "most active alarmed objects" or "most
active persons".
Activity Event: Displays data retrieved from the ActivityEvent log in the
Continuum database. There are 11 available types of activity data from which
to choose. For example, you can see "login attempts per user" or "most
common activities".
Error Event: Displays data retrieved from the ErrorEvent log in the
Continuum database. There are six available types of error data from which to
choose. For example, you can see "error events per workstation" or "most
common errors".
Note: The selections in the other three fields, Report Type, Chart Type, and
Chart Subtype, change, depending on which Data Source you choose.
19-6 Reports
Report Editor
Source Page cont…
Report Type:
This narrows down the type of data on which you want to report, based on the
Data Source.
From the dropdown menu, select the report type on which you want the report to
be based on. The options in the Report Type dropdown menu will change based
on the Data Source selection.
Snapshot-of-object-value: (Only for Current Value): Displays the last

updated value of the object(s) selected in the report.
Object-Value: (Only for ExtendedLog or Refreshed-ExtendedLog): Displays

the value of each log entry based on the object’s log type.
Min-Max-of-Object-Value: (Only for ExtendedLog or Refreshed-

ExtendedLog): Displays the minimum and maximum log value recorded
during the specified time interval.
Average-of-Object-Value: (Only for ExtendedLog or Refreshed-

ExtendedLog): Displays the average log value recorded during the specified
time interval.
Note: The Access Event, Alarm Event, Activity Event and Error Event data
sources have many report types from which to choose. The names of these
report types are self-explanatory.
Note: The selections in the remaining fields, Chart Type and Chart Subtype,
change, depending on what is selected for the Report type.

Report Editor
Source Page cont…
Maximum number of values in the report:
Enter an integer, representing the maximum number of values to plot in your
report when executed. The default is 100.
Chart Type:
The chart type selection will change depending on which Data Source and/or
Report Type has been selected.
Available Chart types are:
 Bar
 Pie
 Text
 Trend
 Minmax
 Clustered Bar
When a chart type is selected, a graphic example is displayed on the Source Page.
Chart Subtype:
Select the chart subtype that is compatible with the chart type that is selected.
When the chart subtype is selected, a graphical example is displayed on the
Source Page.
Trend Chart:
The Trend Chart displays a pictorial graphic of the type of chart that is selected
from the Chart Type and Chart Subtype options.
Configure Columns: (Button)

Click this button to launch the Selectable Columns dialog. The Selectable
Columns dialog allows for adding, remove, and sorting columns for your report.
The columns that are available for any given report change, depending on which
Data Source and/or Report Type you select.
19-8 Reports
Report Editor
Source Page cont…
Selectable Columns Dialog
Columns
Unselected / Selected: Displayed within these 2 windows are the columns

available to display in your report, based on your settings on the Source page.
The columns that initially appear in your report, by default, are listed in the
Selected window. Other columns that are available, but not yet selected, appear
in the Unselected window.
Add / Remove
To add a column in the Unselected window, highlight the unselected column
name you want to add, and click the Add button. This column moves to the
Selected window.
To Remove a column in the Selected window, highlight the column you do not
want to appear in the report, and click the Remove button. This column moves to
the Unselected window.

Report Editor
Source Page
Columns cont…
Up / Down
In a report, columns appear from left to right, according to the order in the
Selected window, whereby the first in the list is the leftmost column, and the last
in the list is the rightmost column.
To change a column's place in the report, highlight its column name, and click the
Up or Down button to move the column up one position or down one position,
respectively.
Sort By
Sort Columns
The Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary dropdown menus establish the sort order
that the report uses.
You may sort events according to three columns:
 PointName
 PointValue
 DateTime
Sort Direction
The checkboxes beside the Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary fields specify the
sort direction for the column values. There are two directions:
 Ascending
 Descending
Ascending order is the default (no check). For descending order, check the
Descending checkbox.
19-10 Reports
Report Editor
Filter Page
There are two types of data on which you may apply a filter for your report:
 Time data
 Object data
The Log Filter and the Time Interval attributes allow you to filter time by selecting
a time filter or by setting up a specific "custom" time range. A log filter is an existing
Continuum-supplied filter object, such as Today and Last Week. By using the Object
Member List you can specify individual point objects on which to report. If there are
thousands of objects, then selecting certain subsets of objects for your report becomes
an important task.
Log Filter:
Selecting this radio button specifies a time range for the report, based on a
Continuum system-supplied filter.
Select the Log Filters browse button to display all the filters in the Root
directory or any folder you specify. Select the desired filter. The name of this
filter appears in the Log Filter field.

Report Editor
Filter Page cont…
Time Interval:
Selecting this radio button defines a specific "custom" time range for the report.
Start: Defines a specific start date and time
End: Defines a specific end date and time
Path:
Use the Path dropdown menu to search for and select, from the tree, a specific
system controller whose member-list objects on which you want to run (view) a
report.
Specifying a controller here is necessary when you have two or more controllers
containing objects that have the same names from controller to controller. For
example, one moment you may want to run a report on FanInput1 through
FanInput8 residing on one fan controller, and the next moment run another report
on the same named points on another fan controller.
Member Objects:
The member object list window contains a collection of points on which you want
to run a report.
At any one time, you may add or remove one or more objects from the list. For
each member, the member object list columns display the object name and object
class type.
For each member, it also displays either the device ID (the name of the device to
which the object belongs) or the owner name (the name of the folder in which the
object resides).
19-12 Reports
Report Editor
Filter Page cont…
Add (Button):
Use the Add button to add objects to the Member list. A browse dialog will
appear displaying the class of objects that reflect the Object type selected.
Remove (Button):
Use the Remove button to remove objects from the Member list.

Report Editor
Output Page
The settings on the Output page reflect the “look & feel” of the report on how it
appears in the ReportViewer.
Heading:
Enter a text heading to appear at the top of the report. You may use wildcards in
the text.
The default is:
%r (the wild-card (%r) is the report type)
Subheading:
Enter a text subheading to appear beneath the heading, if desired.
The default is:
Report created at %t (the wildcard (%t) is the time when the report is
generated)
19-14 Reports
Report Editor
Output Page cont…
X-caption:
Enter a text caption that describes the values along the X (horizontal) axis of the
plot.
Y-caption:
Enter a text caption that describes the values along the Y (vertical) axis of the
plot.
Z-caption:
Enter a text caption for the Z (for clustered bar chart).
Footnote:
Enter a text footnote, if desired. You may use wildcards in the text.
The default is:
%p (the wildcard (%p) is the report page number)
One plot for all:

One plot for all compares the trends of multiple points with different scales on
one X-and-Y plot.
This radio button is selectable only when running a Report for trend data. To run a
trend for data, from the Source page, select ExtendedLog as a Data Source and
Object-Value as a Report Type.
One plot per member:

One plot per member places each point with its own scale on one X-and-Y plot.
Select this option if trend data from point to point were very dissimilar and
unrelated. For example, comparing analog values with different scales to digital
values with different scales.
This radio button is selectable only when running a Report for trend data. To run a
trend for data, from the Source page, select ExtendedLog as a Data Source and
Object-Value as a Report Type.

Report Editor
Output Page cont…
Report Format:
Select either a "Web" format or a PDF file format that you wish to display when
you run your report in the ReportViewer:
Web - Web displays a graphical (scalable vector graphics) image, such as a

trend chart, bar chart, or pie chart, in the ReportViewer. Use the web format
for HTML displays also.
PDF - PDF outputs a report to an Adobe Acrobat PDF file. With this option,
the content of the PDF file is immediately displayed in the ReportViewer.
Acrobat Reader is launched and embedded in the ReportViewer.
Display the full path in the report:

This option displays the full pathname of the report object in the heading,
subheading and footnote.
Fixed Scale:
Use fixed scales when you do not want the system to set its own scales
automatically based on the point data being plotted.
Select Fixed Scale and enter integers in the From and To fields to designate the
low and high limits of a scale based for the point values units. For example, the
report could show a fixed temperature scale between 60 and 80 degrees.
Output report to email address:

Check the checkbox and enter the email addresses of one or more email recipients
who need to receive an automatic report. This is used by the report command line
tool that schedules a report to run automatically at a specific regular time. When
this report runs automatically, it is emailed to the addresses in this field. Delimit
email addresses with a semicolon.
The email recipients listed here are also the default recipients used when emailing
a report manually via the email button on the ReportViewer.
19-16 Reports
Report Editor
Output Page cont…
Output report to file in path:
Check the checkbox when sending an automatic report to a file.
This is used by the report command line tool that schedules a report to run
automatically at a specific regular time. When this report runs automatically, it is
saved to the file whose path is specified in this field.
Use the browse button to search for and select the path in which you want to save
the report file. (you may manually enter the path in the field)
The system generates a file, with a unique filename, based on the name of the
report and a timestamp. At the time the report is run, a timestamp is appended to
the end of the filename (the Report object name).
Apply: (Button)
Apply saves your Report configuration changes immediately while remaining in
the Report editor. (Select the OK button to save changes and exit the Report
editor)
View Report: (Button)

View Report runs your report based on all the criteria configured in the entire
Report editor. Viewing a report is displayed in the ReportViewer.

Sample Reports
Snapshot Report
19-18 Reports
Sample Reports
Snapshot Editor Settings

Sample Reports
Text Report
19-20 Reports
Sample Reports
Text Editor Settings

Sample Reports
Single Trend Report
19-22 Reports
Sample Reports
Single Trend Editor Settings

Sample Reports
Multiple Trend Report
19-24 Reports
Sample Reports
Multiple Trend Editor Settings

Sample Reports
Pie Chart Report
19-26 Reports
Sample Reports
Pie Chart Editor Settings

19-28 Reports
Ch 20 Advanced
Explorer
Chapter Contents
 Options Menu / Object Menu
 Send to Controller
 Send to Database
 Infinet i2 Controllers
20-2 Advanced Explorer

Options Menu
Continuum Explorer's Options menu consists of 5 advanced topics that control the
way a system operates.
 Copy Options…
 Import Into Options…
 Send To Text File Options…
 Send To Controller Options…
 Send To Database Options…
Copy Options…
Continuum Explorer makes it easy to copy objects among containers.
Use the Copy and Paste options from the Edit menu, or simply drag objects from
one container to another. Because this process is so easy, it is wise to set up a few
rules to avoid conflicts:
 How should Continuum deal with duplicate object names?
 Specify certain object classes that should not be copied.
 When copying the entire contents of a container, are there certain

restrictions to impose?
The Copy Options dialog helps answer these questions and control how and when
objects can be copied in Continuum Explorer.

Options Menu
Copy Options… (General Page)
Source Container Options
The Source Container Options defines whether to copy an object or just its
contents.
 Copy Source containers to the specified targets: When selecting this

option, dragging an InfinetController from one NetController to another
will copy the container object (the InfinetController) as well as its
contents.
 Do Not Copy Source containers to the specified targets, instead copy

the sources child objects to the specified targets: When selecting this
option, dragging an InfinetController on to another InfinetController, only
the contents of the first InfinetController will be copied to the second.
(This option is typically used)

Options Menu
Copy Options… (General Page)
Source Object Options
Source objects describe what is inside the container objects.
 Do not copy child objects: Only the Container will be copied.
 Copy child objects, but do not copy the children’s children: When
selecting this option, copying one NetController onto another will copy its
Infinet controllers as well but not the points in the Infinet controllers.
(This option is typically used)
 Copy child objects and the children’s children: When selecting this
option, copying one NetController onto another will copy its Infinet
controllers and the points in the Infinet controllers.

Options Menu
Copy Options… (Name Conflicts Page)

Within the Name Conflicts page, decisions are based on how Continuum deals with
objects that have the same name in the source and target containers.
Name conflicts only affect a copy operation when there is an object in the target
location that has the same name or alias as the source.

Options Menu
Copy Options… (Name Conflicts Page) cont…
Renaming Options
This series of options offers a selection of rules for Continuum to follow when
copying objects and name conflicts occur.
The Renaming Options are the default settings and Continuum will generate a
new name and a new alias for the copied object if an object with the same name
or alias exists within the target folder, device, or container.
When selecting:
New objects are created with an (_1, _2, _3…) under the Alias and Name
columns.

Options Menu
Simple Object Options
If you choose to deselect the Renaming options, the Simple Object Options will
be highlighted.
 Skip source objects with name conflict: Selecting this option informs
Continuum that if an object with that name already exists in the device or
container, then do not copy the object.
 Merge target objects with name conflicts if the source object is of the
same class, otherwise skip the source object: When selecting this
option, Continuum will merge the attributes of an existing object with the
object being copied in if they are of the same class. The original object
remains, but it now has the attributes of the object being copied. If the
name conflict is between objects of different classes, the copy is skipped.
 Merge target objects with name conflicts if the source object is of the
same class, otherwise replace the source object: With this option
selected, Continuum will merge the attributes of an existing object with
the object being copied in if they are of the same class. The original object
remains; it now has the attributes of the object being copied. If the name
conflict is between objects of different classes then the original object is
replaced with the object being copied.
 Replace target objects with name conflicts: With this option selected,
Continuum will simply replace objects that have name conflicts with the
objects being copied in. Be very careful with this option because when
replacing a pre-existing object it may cause unintended consequences in
programs, alarms, groups etc.

Options Menu
Container Options
If you choose to deselect the Renaming options, the Container Options will be
highlighted.
 Merge Source and Target containers with name conflicts: With this
option Continuum will merge the attributes of the two containers with a
name conflict, retaining the original containers object ID.
 Delete Target containers with name conflicts: With this option,

Continuum will delete the Target container and replace it with the Source
container. Another option to be very careful using.

Options Menu
Copy Options… (Class Filter Page)

In this page, you apply a filter to one or more Continuum objects.
It could be used if you are copying an entire controller and don’t want to copy
schedules and groups.
Filter Options
With Filter options, the Continuum administrator can make proactive decisions
about classes of an object that will, or will not be copied.
 Copy all Source Objects: All classes of objects will copy. This is the
default selection.
 Copy objects of the following classes: By selecting this option the

administrator can select only the classes of objects that need to be copied.
(For example, infinity inputs and infinity outputs only)
 Do not copy objects of the following classes: By selecting this option

the administrator can select only the classes of objects that need not be
copied (for example schedules, system variables, and groups). Every class
besides the ones selected will be copied.

Options Menu
Import Into Options…
The Import Into Option allows for setting various skip, merge, replace and area
link options when performing import operations. Specifically importing from
ASCII dump files and importing from CSV files.

Options Menu
Skip, Merge and Replace Options
These offer the same tools as the simple object options on the copy options tab.
 Skip source objects with name conflict: This option tells Continuum
that if an object with the name already exists in the device or container,
then do not copy the object.
 Merge target objects with name conflicts if the source object is of

the same class, otherwise skip the source object: With this option
selected Continuum will merge the attributes of an existing object with
the object being copied in if they are of the same class. The original
object remains, but it now has the attributes of the object being copied. If
the name conflict is between objects of different classes, the copy is
skipped.
 Merge target objects with name conflicts if the source object is of

the same class, otherwise replace the source object: With this option
selected Continuum will merge the attributes of an existing object with
the object being copied in if they are of the same class. The original
object remains; it now has the attributes of the object being copied. If the
name conflict is between objects of different classes, then the original
object is replaced with the object being copied.
 Replace target objects with name conflicts: With this option selected
Continuum will simply replace objects that have name conflicts with the
objects being copied in. Be very careful with this option because when
replacing a pre-existing object, it may cause unintended consequences in
programs, alarms or groups.

Options Menu
Area Link Options
This only applies to Personnel with the use of the RefTemplate attribute.
 Overwrite existing Area Link: This option will overwrite the personnel
target object’s area links with the personnel source file object’s area links.
 Append imported area links to existing area links: The option will add
the personnel source file object’s area links to the area link of the
personnel target object.
 Replace the area links from the personnel’s parent template with the
area links from the new parent template but leave all other area links
unchanged: This option will replace the area links in a personnel object’s
parent template with the source file area links, then append these template
links to the target object, leaving all other target object links unchanged.
The target object, therefore, now has its own links plus the updated
template links.
 Distribute Personnel during an ASCII import - Check this box to

ensure that the information is newly imported into the database is
distributed to all the controllers that are affected by the modified objects.

Options Menu
Area Link Options cont…
A Personnel Area List is effected depending on which Area Link Options were
selected prior to .CSV import.
Area link imported from template
Area link manually added
This is an example of a .CSV file for the import of one personnel object.
More complex import details are discussed in the System Admin course.

Object Menu
Import Into…
After determining the rules associated with importing files, .csv or .dmp files can
be imported into the system.
This can be an efficient way of importing large amounts of information into the
system.
Selecting the Import Into… option from the Object menu allows you to save a
text file in the .csv or .dmp format. This file can be saved to the windows desktop
and imported into a container object.
Use the dropdown to select the

.csv or .dmp format

Options Menu
Send To Text File Options…
Continuum Explorer allows you to set various source-object options and text-file
options when you when you are exporting to ASCII dump files.
 Do not dump child objects: Select this option to export an object’s data,
but not the child objects - that is, not the objects contained within the
controllers belonging to the parent object.
 Dump Child object, but do not dump the children’s children: Select
this option to export an object’s data as well as its child objects, but do not
export the child objects within controllers contained beneath those child
controllers.
 Dump child objects and the children’s children: Select this object to
export the parent object and everything beneath it. This operation exports
the parent object, all objects contained within controllers belonging to the
parent object, plus all objects within the controllers contained beneath the
child controllers.

Options Menu
Send To Text File Options…
Text File Options
 Overwrite the file if it already exists: Select this option to overwrite the
target text file’s data with the data from the source object.
 Append to file if it already exists: Select this option to add the source
objects data to the data in the target folder.
 Dump pictures to a separate file

Selecting this checkbox will allow the export of graphics contained within
the source object into separate bitmap graphic files. This operation results
in one text file for all objects data plus individual graphics files for the
pictures.

Object Menu
Send To Text File

After determining the rules associated with exporting files, .dmp files can be
exported from the system.
This can be an efficient way of exporting large amounts of information from the
system for data manipulation and for use at similar Continuum sites.
Selecting the Send To > Text File… option from the Object menu allows you to
dump information out of the system and saves it in an ASCII .dmp format.

Options Menu
Send To Controller Options…
Continuum Explorer can set source object options when performing a "send-to-
controller", that is, when updating an object in the Continuum database and need
to distribute or "reload" the updated data to controllers that need to know about
the updates.
Caution: The Send to Controller operation resets the controller and turns off
all outputs. Choosing the selection Reload attached objects and controllers
shuts down the entire building.
Typical Selection
 Do not reload attached objects: Select this radio button to reload the
controller, but do not reload the data from the attached objects.
 Reload attached objects, but not attached controllers: Select this radio
button to reload the newly updated object's data in the affected controllers,
but do not reload the child objects belonging to the controllers contained
within this parent (attached) object in the device hierarchy.
 Reload attached objects and controllers: Select this radio button to

reload the newly updated object's data in the affected controllers, and also
reload the data ob objects belonging to the controllers contained within
this parent (attached) object in the device hierarchy

Send To Controller
After the Send To Controller Options have been set, a manual send to controller
must be performed.
1. From Continuum Explorer, right-click on the controller that is to be reloaded

and select Send To and then Controller.
2. When the Confirm Operations window displays, select Ok.
3. Upon completion, double click the distribution properties icon to confirm the
reload.
Double click distribution properties icon

Send to Database Overview
When objects are directly modified in a controller from a Command Terminal editor,
they are automatically sent to the SQL database if DBSync is checked at both the
network and controller.
This feature can be disabled by deselecting, “Controller to CyberStation DBSync” in

the Network page of the InfinityController editor.
When this feature is enabled, editing an object, creating a new object and deleting an
object from a Command Terminal will send those changes to the CyberStation to be
updated in the database if the workstation is online.
If a reload is performed through the Command Terminal, the controller informs the
SQL database that it was reloaded and that a manual SQL synchronization is
necessary. Continuum marks (with a flag) the controller icon in the Explorer. The flag
presents a tool tip when the cursor is placed over it.
The purpose of the flag is to ensure that system administrators and other CyberStation
users are aware that changes have occurred to the controller and a save to database
must be accomplished.

Options Menu
Send To Database Options…
Continuum Explorer can set source-object options when performing a "send-to-

database", that is, when updating an object directly in a controller from a
command terminal and need to notify system administrators that these updates
must be synchronized with the Continuum database.
 Do not save attached objects - Select this radio button to perform a save
of the Continuum database, but do not save data from attached objects.
 Save attached objects, but not attached controllers - Select this radio
button to save, in the Continuum database, the data in the object that was
just directly updated in a controller from the command terminal, but do
not save the child objects belonging to the controllers contained in this
parent (attached) object in the device hierarchy.
 Save attached objects and controllers - Select this radio button to save,
in the Continuum database, the data in the object that was just directly
updated in a controller from the command terminal, and also save the
child objects belonging to the controllers contained in this parent
(attached) object in the device hierarchy.

Send To Database
After the Send To Database Options has been selected, a manual database
synchronization must be performed.
1. From Continuum Explorer, right-click on the controller that is to be sent and

select Send To and then Database.
2. When the Confirm Operations window displays, select Ok.
3. Upon completion, double click the distribution properties icon to confirm the
send to database.
Double click distribution properties icon

i2 Controllers
Controller Memory
Infinet II controllers except the i2885, i2885-V, and i2887(L) have two distinct
program memories. One is dedicated to the lower-level operation of the controller and
the other holds user-defined items such as point data and Plain English programs.
Application Memory (RAM)

Plain English programs and point data are stored in Application Memory. This
memory is backed up with a battery to guard against power failure.
Flash Memory
The controller includes an extra Flash Memory for storing some of the
Application data as well. This Flash Memory can be commanded to store the
configuration data contained in the battery-backed memory as an extra insurance
against loss.
In order to properly utilize this feature, it is necessary to understand the different

ways that Infinet i2 controllers can operate upon power up.
 Cold Start
The controller powers up from reset with no user objects or configuration
in place.
 Cool Start
The controller powers up from reset and restores the user configuration
from Flash memory. It is assumed that a configuration was explicitly
saved by the user at some point prior to power down. Point log data is not
restored (with the exception of manual arrays on setpoints), Plain English
programs are started at their beginning, and user points, whose SetPoint
attribute has been set, have their values restored. Cool start can be thought
of as a “self reload”.
 Warm Start
The controller powers up from reset with a user configuration in place.
The user configuration is that which was present in the controller and
preserved due to the battery-backed memory when it was reset and/or
power was lost. Point log data is preserved, Plain English programs are
restarted at the same logical line that was being interpreted when the
controller shut down, and all user points have their values restored.

i2 Controllers
Setting the ACCRestartMode Attribute
When selecting a restart mode to use, the value of the i2 system variable
ACCRestartMode must be set.
 ACCWarmStartOnly
The controller, upon recovery from reset, attempts a warm start; if that
fails, proceeds with cold start.
 ACCCoolStartOnly:
The controller, upon recovery from reset, attempts a cool start; if that fails,
proceeds with cold start.
 ACCWarmToCool:
The controller, upon recovery from reset, attempts warm start; if that fails,
attempts a cool start; if that fails, proceeds with cold start. This is the
default mode for the controller.
Flash Backup Notification

Continuum provides the following safeguard to ensure the need to backup an
Infinity i2 controller. This is true for the WarmToCool and CoolStartOnly modes.
It does not apply to the WarmStartOnly mode.
Whenever an Infinet i2 controller needs to have a backup done, a flag in the form
of an exclamation point will appear over the controller's icon in Continuum's
Explorer. The flag presents a tool tip when placing the cursor over it.
To backup the controller, use the Backup to Flash button on the

InfinityInfinetCltr General page.

Ch 21 Menu Pages
Chapter Contents
 Continuum Menu Pages
 Options Settings
 Create a New Menu Page
 Create a Hotspot
 Properties
 Button Wizard
 Button Wizard Vs. Properties
 Execute an Application
 Navigate to a Menu Page
 Open an Object
 Create an Object From a Template
21-2 Menu Pages

Continuum Menu Pages
Continuum allows the creation of custom menu pages making navigation within a
control system more intuitive for the user.
Menu pages have two modes of operation:
 Run mode
 Edit mode
Right clicking on a menu page displays a pop-up menu.
Menu options differ from Run mode to that of Edit mode. Edit mode offers
configuration capabilities.
Run Mode Menu Edit Mode Menu

Options Settings
To access the Options menu, right click anywhere on the menu page that is not a
hotspot and select Options.
Options - The Options settings determine what information will be displayed

within the Status Line.
Status
Line
Show:
Toggles the Status Line On or Off.
User Name:
Displays or removes the User Name from the Status Line.
Workstation Name:
Displays or removes the Workstation Name from the Status Line.
Date:
Displays or removes the Date from the Status Line.
Time:
Displays or removes the Time from the Status Line.
21-4 Menu Pages

Create a New Menu Page
A menu system is the primary interface with Continuum and specific for each control
system.
1. Right click on a menu page and select Edit from the pop-up menu.
A set of icons will be displayed allowing 4 options:
New Run
Page Page
Save About
New Page: Creates a new menu page to the existing menu system.
Save: Saves the menu page.
Run Page: Puts the system into run mode.
About: Displays the version of Continuum along with the Serial Number.
2. Right click on the menu page once again and select New Page… from the pop-
up menu.

3. The Page Edit window appears. Give the page a Name that is appropriate for
its purpose.
Page Information
Name:
Defines the purpose of the page. This name will show up on the Change Page
menu option allowing the user to navigate to this page.
Description:
Describe briefly the purpose of the menu page.
Main Page:
Selecting this option makes this page display first when Continuum starts up.
This option is used for setting the Home or Main page of the system.
21-6 Menu Pages

Multimedia
Background File:
When creating custom menu pages, it is most likely they are created within a
graphics program such as Photoshop and then imported into the system as a
bitmap (.bmp) file for the background.
Audio
File to Play:
Allows for a .wav audio file to be played whenever the page is displayed.
Enable:
When selected, the audio file will play.
When un-selected, the audio file won't play.
Use MS MPlayer:
When selected, the audio file will be played with Microsoft Media Player.
Video
File to Play:
Allows for an .avi video file to be played whenever the page is displayed.
Enable:
When selected, the video file will play.
When un-selected, the video file won't play.
Full Screen:
When selected, the video file will play in the full screen mode.

4. In the Multimedia area, select a bitmap (.bmp) Background graphic to be
displayed for the menu page.
5. Select the OK button. The Bitmap will be displayed as the new menu screen.
21-8 Menu Pages

Create a Hot Spot
Hot spots are transparent areas on a menu page that perform specific functions such
as:
 Navigate to another menu page

 Launch an application
 Run a program
 Open objects
 Create new objects
 Edit objects
While in edit mode, hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse to cover the
desired area. The hot spot area will be surrounded by dotted lines.
A Hot Spot is Defined by Dotted Lines
Because hotspots are transparent, when a cursor enters a hotspot, the mouse's pointer
will turn into a finger, defining that area.
Properties
The Properties menu selection allows for the creation of Hotspots. Simple actions like
navigating menu pages or opening an executable file can easily be accomplished here.
Some of the advanced actions that can be tied to a hotspot may be best created
through the button wizard.
Button Wizard
Using the Button Wizard for creating Hotspots allows for an intuitive step-by-step
procedure that simplifies the use of advanced actions.

Button Wizard Vs. Properties
The example shown here are settings to create a personnel object from a template.
The settings were created through the Button Wizard. After completing the button
wizard procedure, the Properties window was opened (as shown). The 2 prompts
labeled Open: and Arguments: were automatically filled in. This is what simplifies
the process using the Button Wizard. The settings could have had been made directly
within the Properties window, but the argument would have had to been typed in
manually. For an advanced person this may be the preferred choice. For a beginner,
the Button Wizard would be the preferred choice.
If a hotspot is a simple action, like to change menu page or execute an application, the
Properties window is the preferred choice. The Properties window offers 2 radio
buttons to accomplish these types of actions making it very simple.
Properties Window
Advanced actions may be easier to accomplish using the

Button Wizard since it fills in these fields automatically
21-10 Menu Pages

Execute an Application
1. While in edit mode, hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse to cover
the desired area. The hot spot area will be surrounded by dotted lines.
A Hot Spot is Defined by Dotted Lines
2. With the cursor in the hot spot, right click and select the Properties… option from
the menu.

3. The Edit HotSpot window appears.
Name:
Defines the name of the hotspot.
Description:
Describes the action the hotspot performs.
Control
Execute - Opens an application.
Change Page - Navigates to another menu page within the system.
Open:
Select the application that is to open. The extension for an executable file is (.exe)
21-12 Menu Pages

Arguments:
Set a predetermined function through a simple Plain English programming
statement. This works in conjunction with opening the Command Line.
Execute the Command Line (CmdLine.exe) and

set an Argument for it to use.
This Argument turns the fan on at the TCX01:
"Set CN\NC01\TCX01\Fan = On"
Make hotspot look like a windows button:

Selecting this option will turn the transparent hotspot into a windows style button.
Button:
Enter the text that is to appear on the button.
4. Select the Execute option from the Control area.
5. From the Open dialog, select an application (.exe) to open.
6. Select OK to accept these settings.

7. From the menu icons, select Run mode.
Run mode icon
8. Select Yes from the "Save Changes" window.
Open the application by selecting the hotspot from the menu page.
21-14 Menu Pages

Change Menu Page
1. While in edit mode, hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse to the
desired button size. At this point, the button is defined as a hot spot area surrounded
by dotted lines.
2. With the cursor in the hot spot, right click and select the Properties… option from
the menu.
3. The Edit HotSpot window appears.
For definitions of these settings, refer to "Creating a Hotspot".

Change Menu Page
Open:
The Open dialog box displays all the menu pages that were created within a
system.
4. From the Open dialog box, select the menu page to navigate to.
5. Select, "Make hotspot look like a window button".
6. In the Button dialog box, name the button to the page of which to navigating to
and OK the settings.
Run mode icon
Navigate to the page by selecting the button.
21-16 Menu Pages

Open an Existing Object
by dotted lines.
2. With the cursor in the hot spot, right click and select the Button Wizard… option
from the menu.
3. From the Creating a Button window, select Open an existing object and then
select Next.

4. Select, I would like to open a specific object
5. From the drop-down menu, select a Class of Object the button is to open.
21-18 Menu Pages

6. Select an object for the button to open.
7. Select, Make hotspot look like a windows button and enter a name for the button.
Select the Finish button to complete the settings.

Run mode icon
10. Select the new button to open object.
21-20 Menu Pages

Create a new Object Through an Existing Template
Object
by dotted lines.
2. With the cursor in the hot spot, right click and select the Button Wizard… option
from the menu.
3. From the Creating a Button window, select Create a new object from an existing
template object and then select Next.

Object
4. From the drop-down menu, select a template object the button is to access.
5. Select the appropriate container to store the newly created object
21-22 Menu Pages

Object
6. Select, Make hotspot look like a windows button and enter a name for the
button. Select the Finish button to complete the settings.
Run mode icon
9. Select the new button to create an object.

21-24 Menu Pages
Ch 22 Graphics
Chapter Contents
 What is Pinpoint
 Graphic Panels
 Creating a Graphic Panel
 Options Editor
 Configuration Editor
 Drawing Tools
 Windows Control
 Active Components
 Image Library
 Inserting a Scale
22-2 Graphics
What is Pinpoint
Pinpoint is a graphics application that works with Continuum. Pinpoint is where
graphic panels are created to provide the user a graphical interface that simulates a
"virtual" control panel.
Note: Since graphics vary greatly from one implementation to another, this chapter
only illustrates the wide-array of HVAC and Access Control graphical options.
Graphic Panels
Graphic Panels are interface tools that display pictorial representations of elements
within the control system. Graphic panels can contain a wide-variety of items
including photographs, clip art, graphic controls, and buttons. Pinpoint Graphic
Panels offer a wide array of control options for controlling a building automation
system. Through the use of switches, sliders, buttons, knobs, active text controls,
animations, etc… the monitor and control of a system is easy.
Opening a Graphic Panel

To open a graphic panel, perform the following steps.
1. From Continuum‟s main menu, select the button labeled Graphics.
A ListView will appear displaying all the graphic panels (in this case, only two
are displayed.)

Graphic Panels
Opening a Graphic Panel cont…
2. Double click on a panel to open it. Below are examples of an HVAC graphics
panel and an Access Control panel.
HVAC Example
Access Control Example
A graphic panel may contain more than one panel of information. Each panel
is represented as a tab and is accessible by clicking on the tab text located at
the bottom of the Pinpoint application
Tabs
22-4 Graphics
Creating a Graphic Panel
1. Right click on the controller that will own the graphic and select New and then
Graphic.
3. Enter an Object Name for the graphic panel and select Create.

Creating a Graphic Panel
Pinpoint displays a blank graphic panel that can now be configured.
22-6 Graphics
Options Editor
To access Pinpoint's Options Editor, from the menu bar select View / Options.
Folders Location Page

The Folder Location settings determine whether to access the image folders
(Graphics, Image, and Background folders) from a central location, such as a server,
or on the local drive of a workstation. Using a central location makes changes easier
since only having to make them on the “central” location. This is an important
consideration if working with a large number of workstations. However, because the
data must travel through a network, accessing them will be slower than if the data was
on each workstation.
Note: A signal icon warns you if there is an error within the path to the currently
selected folder. Verify the path or browse to the desired folder. The icon disappears
when a valid path is chosen.
Graphics Folder:
This is the „.pin‟ file storage location of graphics that is accessed. In a multi-user
setup this could be a shared location across the workstations.
Image Folder:
This is the image file storage location that contains ready-made images that you
can use to make graphic panels in Pinpoint. The installation program usually
performs this optional setup.
Background Folder:
This is the background image file storage location that serves as the background
for the panels. The background image graphic is a link to the background image.

Options Editor
Save Page
Warn Save Into Run Mode:

If selected, Pinpoint displays a message asking to save the panel file before
entering Run Mode. Pinpoint always saves the panel file automatically when
entering Run Mode.
Make Backup Copy Panel File:

If selected, Pinpoint will automatically make a backup copy of a panel (.pin) file
when that panel file is saved in the graphics folder. Backup files have the
extension: *.bck.
22-8 Graphics
Options Editor
Panel Page
Home Panel:
Select a Pinpoint graphic as the Pinpoint application home panel. When the Home
button of the Standard Tool Bar is selected, the home panel opens.
No Change:
Opens the Home Panel with no change to the current panel's state.
Minimize:
Opens the Home Panel and minimizes the current panel.
Close: (default)
Opens the Home Panel and closes the current panel.

Options Editor
Units Page
Default Paper Orientation Field:

Select the radio button to choose the default paper orientation (landscape or
portrait).
Units of Measure Drop Menu:

Select the units of measure for the size of your canvas. The default is inches.
22-10 Graphics
Configuration Editor
The Configuration Editor allows for configuring basic characteristics for a panel.
From Pinpoint's menu bar select File / Configuration…
General Page
Description:
Enter a general description of the panel of up to 256 letters.
Graphic Panel File:

Select a filename for the file that is created when the panel is saved. By default, it
takes the same name as the panel object.
You may browse for a location for the saved file. All files are saved to a specific
location (shared in a multi-user environment) usually set at:
C:\Program Files\Continuum\NewGraphicsFiles
Graphic panel files have a suffix of .pin

Plain English Program to Run When the Panel is Opened:

Use this field to browse for and select a Plain English Program to run when the
panel is in run mode.
Stop When Panel is Closed:

If selected a Plain English program to run when the panel opens, check this
checkbox to stop the execution of the Plain English program when closing the
panel or put it into design mode.
If the checkbox is not checked, the Plain English program continues to run when
the panel is closed or put in design mode.
Window Size: Previous / Maximize
Previous - Retains the position/size of the panel when it was last saved.
Maximize - Maximizes the panel window.
Scroll Bars:
Select this checkbox to display scroll bars when viewed in run or design mode.
22-12 Graphics
Canvas Page
Background Color:
Use the dropdown menu to select the desired background color for the panel.
Background File:
Browse for and select the filename for the background file that is used when the
panel is loaded. If the background file changes, the panel will reflect the latest
change.
The location of the file is usually:
C:\Program Files\Continuum\NewGraphicsFiles\Backgrounds
If selecting a background folder outside of the default background folder specified

in the Options dialog, a copy of the file is placed in the default folder.
If using a background file for your panel, it will override the background color.
Match Image Size:

Select the Match Image Size button to set the canvas size to match the size of the
background image.
Canvas Width/Height:
Enter the dimensions of the canvas.
Usually the panel dimensions reflect the paper size for the default printer, but the
dimensions can be any desired size.

Object List Page
Provides applicable object names, component names, and active polling rates
Delete:
Deletes the selected object.
Go To:
Selects the active component and brings it to the center.
Find Object Field:

Finds an object selected by the user.
Replace With Field:

Replaces the object found in the Find Object field with an object selected by the
user.
Replace Object Control:

Replaces the selected object with the one specified by the user.
Replace All Objects Control:

Replaces all selected objects with the one specified by the user.
22-14 Graphics
Drawing Toolbar
Pinpoint provides drawing capabilities that are similar to most drawing applications.
Draw or insert the following types of components onto a panel:
Lines
Polylines
Polygon
Rectangle Draw
Polycurve
Closed Curve
Ellipse
Text
Insert
Image
To access the Drawing Toolbar, from Pinpoints menu bar, select:
View / Toolbars / Drawing

Drawing Toolbar
Toolbars can be dragged onto the canvas area by dragging the toolbar by its outer
edge.
Toolbars can be dragged

onto the canvas area
From the Drawing toolbar, select the desired tool to use.
Line Tool
The line tool is for drawing lines.
Click and hold down the mouse button in an empty area on the canvas. Drag the
cursor until the line is the desired length and release the mouse button.
Polyline Tool
The polyline tool is for drawing open shapes.
Click the mouse button once on the canvas to make the first point. Move the
cursor to where the next point will be and click the mouse button. Move the
cursor to the next location and click the mouse button. Repeat this process as
necessary. To finish the polyline, double click at its last point.
22-16 Graphics
Drawing Toolbar
Polygon Tool
The polygon tool is for drawing closed shapes.
Click the mouse button once on the canvas to make the first point. Move the
cursor to where the next point will be and click the mouse button. Move the
cursor to the next location and click the mouse button. Repeat this process as
necessary. To finish the polygon, double click at its last point.
Rectangle Tool
The rectangle tool is for drawing rectangles and squares.
cursor until the shape is the desired size and release the mouse button.
To make a perfect square, hold down the shift key while dragging to maintain
equal proportion.
Polycurve Tool
The polycurve tool is for drawing open curves.
By clicking the mouse at different locations on the canvas, different curves can be
created. A dotted line will trail the points to define the shape. When finished,
double click the mouse button to complete the curve.
Drawing Mode
Finished Curve

Drawing Toolbar
Closed Curve Tool

The closed curve tool is for drawing closed curves.
By clicking the mouse at different locations on the canvas, different curves can be
created. A dotted line will trail the points to define the shape. When finished,
double click the mouse button at the first point to complete the shape.
Drawing Mode
Finished Shape
Ellipse Tool
The ellipse tool is for drawing ellipses and circles.
cursor until the shape is the desired size and release the mouse button.
To make a perfect circle, hold down the shift key while dragging to maintain
equal proportion.
22-18 Graphics
Drawing Toolbar
Text Tool
The text tool is for creating text.
Clicking on the canvas will display a text box.
The text can be changed by right clicking on the text box and selecting Edit Text
from the pop-up menu.
Image Tool
The image tool inserts graphic images onto the canvas and supports the following
formats:
.bmp (bitmap files)

.ico (icon files)
.emf (enhanced metafiles)
.jpg (jpeg files)
Selecting the Image Tool button allows to browse for a graphic.
After a graphic has been selected, click once on the canvas to place it.

Windows Controls
From the Windows Controls menu, select the appropriate control and it will be
automatically created on the Pinpoint canvas.
To access the Objects Properties Editor, select the object and from the Edit menu,
select Object Properties…
Selected Object
22-20 Graphics
Windows Controls
Button
The button control is displayed as a standard Windows button.
A Button allows these options depending on a systems configuration:
 Open Object
 Open Panel
 Replace Point
 Run / Stop Plain English Program
 Start Windows Program
 Toggle Value
 Current Panel

Windows Controls
Edit Box
The edit box control displays a value that can be changed.
There are two ways to edit the displayed value.
1. By left clicking on the displayed value, a calculator will be displayed

allowing to change its value.
2. By right clicking on the displayed value, the Object Editor Window is

displayed allowing to edit its value.
22-22 Graphics
Windows Controls
Switch
Switches can be displayed representing a wide variety of styles. Switches are used
to turn On/Off or Open and Close objects.
There are two ways to change a switch‟s State/Value.
 Click on the switch with the left mouse button.
 By right clicking on the switch, the Object Editor Window is displayed

allowing to change its value.

Windows Controls
Combo Box
The downward arrow located at the right side of its box defines this control. The
Combo Box offers a unique way for changing values.
Click on the Downward Arrow located to the right side of the Combo Box. The
Combo Box expands displaying a range of values to select from.
Click on the desired value to be displayed. The box closes displaying the new
value.
22-24 Graphics
Windows Controls
Slider
Displays a Windows Slider Control with values that represent the starting and
ending points for an object.
There are two ways to change a sliders value.
 Click on the slider knob with the left mouse button. While holding down
the mouse button, drag the slider knob in either direction. The new value
will be displayed under the slider knob.
 By right clicking anywhere on the slider, the Object Editor Window is

displayed allowing to change its value.

Windows Controls
Video
Displays a video file (.avi) or plays video from an attached video source.
Video Control Menu Options
The video controls are different depending on what version of Microsoft's

Windows Media Player is being used. Please refer to Microsoft
documentation for these descriptions.
Check Box
Displays a labeled box that when clicked on, toggles a check mark on and off.
22-26 Graphics
Windows Controls
Web Browser
Displays a Web Browser window allowing to access TAC WebServer application
or any site on the Internet/Intranet.
Progress Bar
Displays a rectangle box (horizontal or vertical) that changes color and represents
an accumulating effect reflecting the displayed value.
43.0
Trend
Displays a graph of live data over time.

Windows Controls
LED
Displays an illuminated numeric control.
Doors
The Window Door Control provides a graphic display of a Continuum Door
Object. A Door Control illustrates the switched state of a door by displaying its
icon in different states.
 Alarm
 Enabled / Disabled
 Locked / Unlocked
 Scheduled Lock / Unlock
 Trouble
 Timed Unlock
 Enabled / Disabled - Keypad / Reader Access
If the doors on a graphic panel were configured allowing User Entry, it would
allow the user to interact with the Door Control. Right click on the Door Control
to access a menu.
22-28 Graphics
Active Components
An Active Component is a graphic object that has been tied to a point and reacts a
particular way depending on how it was configured.
Text and/or graphics need to be created on the canvas first and also selected before
these options are available to use. The type of graphic determines what options are
available for use. For example, a text object can't be an active switch and an ellipse
can't be an active bar.
To access the Objects Properties Editor, select the object and from the Edit menu,
select Object Properties…
Select the object

first to access the
Properties editor

Active Components
Text
Off
Active Text Page
Object Field:
Browse or type in the path to a Continuum point.
User Entry Field:

Select this box to change the value of a point from the panel.
High/Low Limit:
Enter the maximum and minimum values accepted when user entry is enabled.
Object State: Enabled / Disabled

Set the color of the text to define the point's state. For example, Green can
resemble Enabled and Red can resemble the Disabled state of the point.
Include Units:
Select this option to display the points units attribute along with its value.
22-30 Graphics
Active Components
Text
Misc Page
Active Polling Rate:

Set this rate to poll an object attribute for its values at the Active Rate (in ms).
This poll occurs when a panel is active.
Inactive Polling Rate:

Set this rate to poll an object attribute for its values at the Inactive Rate (in
ms). This poll occurs when a panel is inactive or when a control is with focus
but out of view.
Tool/Tips:
Select this checkbox to display ToolTips. A ToolTip is a text box that
describes an object‟s function when the cursor passes over that object in Run
Mode.
Attached Object:
Select this radio button if there is an object attached.
User Defined:
Select this radio button to enter a custom ToolTip text for this component.

Active Components
Button
Active Button Page
See the Windows Components Button for a description of these settings.
22-32 Graphics
Active Components
Animated Button
Active Animated Button Page
Trigger:
Enter or browse to the object used to trigger the animated effects of the button.
The trigger is the point or attribute that initiates an event.
Trigger Options:
Use the drop-down list to select the event that triggers button animation.
The following are the three available choices:
 On/Off
 Alarm
 Ranges

Active Components
Animated Button
Active Animated Button Page cont…
Disable Action:
Select this checkbox to disable the action on the button.
Action:
Choose an action to be triggered by the button from the drop-down list.
 Open Object
 Open Panel
 Replace Point
 Run Plain English Program
 Start Windows Program
 Stop Plain English Program
 Toggle Value
Object:
If needed, enter or browse to the action object.
Current Window:
Select the checkbox that indicates what will happen to the current window when
the panel is launched.
22-34 Graphics
Active Components
Animated Button
Options Page
Trigger Option Value:

The Trigger Option Values that appear in the drop-down list are determined by
the selection you make in the Trigger Options on the Active Animated Button
page. Use this page to determine how the button appears in each state.
Both ON and OFF require separate configuration.
Fill:
Activate this checkbox to select Fill options for the state indicated in the Trigger
Option Value field. The Fill Properties dialog box appears.
Visible:
Select this checkbox for the button to be visible in that state.
Blink and Beep:

Select these checkboxes for the button to blink and/or beep in that state.

Active Components
Switch
On Off
Create two drawings, or insert two images - one to show the On state and one to show
the Off state.
Do not combine the On and Off switches by grouping them together, each should
remain a separate graphic object.
Select the Off image and drag it so that it covers the On image. The visible state
should only be the Off appearance of the switch.
It is important that the Off graphic is directly over the On graphic for a smooth
transition between states.
The On state is directly

underneath the Off state
Select the Off state and from the Active Components menu, select Switches.
22-36 Graphics
Active Components
Switch
Active Switch Page
Object:
Select an object that the switch is to control.
Since a switch has only two settings, the object or attribute must have only two
states.
User Entry:
Allows the user to toggle the state of the object.

Active Components
Bar
100
75
50
25
0
Active Bar Page
Object:
Select a Continuum point to monitor.
User Entry:
Select the check box to change the value of point while in run mode.
Top of Scale:
Enter the maximum value to represent a completely expanded bar.
Bottom of Scale:
Enter the minimum value to represent an empty bar.
Vertical/Horizontal:
Select a radio button to indicate which direction the bar is to animate in
proportion to the value.
22-38 Graphics
Active Components
Gauge
The Active Gauge component of this scale is the needle only. Draw a line object and
set it to be the active gauge. The scale was inserted separately and discussed at the
end of this chapter. Incorporating a gauge with a scale produces animated gauges.
Active Gauge Page
Object:
Search for the Continuum point to link the active gauge to.
Scale: Top of Scale / Bottom of Scale

Enter the numbers that are to appear at the top of the gauge (greatest number on
the gauge) and the bottom of the scale (smallest number, usually 0.0). For
example, the gauge might span from 0.0 to 100.0.

Active Components
Gauge
Active Gauge Page cont…
Direction: Clockwise / Counter Clockwise

Select the direction of the numbers on the gauge - Clockwise or Counter
Clockwise.
Clockwise displays the numbers from low to high in a clockwise direction.
Counterclockwise displays the numbers from low to high in a

counterclockwise direction.
Sweep Angle:
The sweep angle indicates the amount of degrees that the dial needle is to move or
"sweep" on the gauge. For example, a gauge that forms a complete circle would
have a sweep angle of 360 degrees. A half circle is 180 degrees.
The direction in which the dial needle sweeps is always clockwise.
Select Pivot Point:
By default, a component chosen to be an Active Rotation object will rotate about

its center. To change the center of rotation, either drag with the mouse or
use the Nudge Pivot buttons to move the rotation selector to the desired
center of rotation.
22-40 Graphics
Active Components
Rotation
Active Rotation Page
Object:
Enter the full path or browse to the point the control represents.
Rotate when:
Always - Indicates that the object always rotates and there is no need to select
a point.
Value is on - You can use Value is on with analog (numeric) or digital

(binary) points. The object rotates whenever the value of the point is not zero.
Direction:
Choose a clockwise or counterclockwise rotation.

Active Components
Rotation
Active Rotation Page cont…
Rotation Parameters:
Rotation Rate - Enter the rotation rate for the control. The valid range for this
field is between 100 and 5000 milliseconds.
Angle - Enter the angle in degrees the control will rotate at each interval based
on the Rotation Rate. The valid range for this field is between 1 and 180
degrees.
Select Pivot Point:
By default, a component chosen to be an Active Rotation object will rotate about

its center. To change the center of rotation, either drag with the mouse or
use the Nudge Pivot buttons to move the rotation selector to the desired
center of rotation.
Center of Rotation
22-42 Graphics
Active Components
Animation
State 1 State 2 State 3 State 4
Active Animation Page
Value:
Search for a point that is used to control the animation.
Image Ranges:
This window displays the viewable range for each image.
Images Files:
Displays the list of files to be used for the animation. Supported formats are
Enhanced Metafiles (.emf) and Bitmap (.bmp).
Select the New and Delete icon buttons to add and remove a files.
Select the Up and Down icon buttons to move the image files up or down.
Preview:
Select this button to preview the animation from the list of images.

Active Components
Animation
Active Animation Page cont…
Analog Specific Settings

High Limit / Low Limit:
Enter the maximum and minimum values.
By changing either value, the ranges will automatically be configured, when the
edit boxes have lost their focus. That is, the image ranges depend on this range.
Change:
Click this button to change the high and low limit for a range selected in the
Image Ranges window.
Reset:
Select this button to reset all the ranges back to their default.
Note: This is only applicable if changes were made to the default range that is
configured for them. The range is also reset when modifying high and/or low
limits.
Hide Animation if Above/Below Range:

Check this checkbox to hide the animation if the value is above/below the
high/low limits.
22-44 Graphics
Active Components
Animation
Active Animation Page cont…
Digital Specific Settings

Animate When On:
Check this checkbox to allow the animation to continue repeating when the value
is on.
Animate only when Change of State:

Check this checkbox to allow the system to run through the image list one time
for change of state ON, and then in reverse order for change of state OFF.
This cycle will happen for every change of state.
Invisible When Off:

Check this checkbox for the image to be invisible when it is not animating.
Current Frame When Off:

If the animation is off, and visible, check this checkbox to allow the current frame
to appear.
Deselecting this checkbox allows for the first frame in the image list appear.
Image Rate:
The rate (in milliseconds) the system cycles through the selected images.

Active Components
Personnel Picture
Active Personnel Page
Person:
Search for the name of the person whose photo to display or enter any attribute
that stores a personnel object. For example, you may use any of the following
objects:
 LastPersonEntered
 LastPersonExited
 LastInvalidEntry
 LastInvalidEntryExit
Selecting one of these attributes displays a person's photo when the person enters
or exits through the door.
22-46 Graphics
Active Components
Personnel Picture
Active Personnel Page cont…
Delay Time:
Enter the number of seconds to display a photo before it fades. If the delay is set
to 0, the personnel photo will not fade.
File:
Search for the personnel photo that is to be displayed.
Supported formats are:
 Bitmap (.bmp)
 JPEG (.jpg)
 Icon (.ico)
User Entry:
Select this option to change the control when in run mode.
Beep when picture changes:

Select this option to hear a beep when a new photo appears.

Image Library
Continuum contains prepackaged graphics that are accessible through the Image
Library.
Supported formats:
 Bitmap (.bmp)
 JPEG (.jpg)
 Enhanced Metafiles (.emf)
 Icon (.ico)
To insert a graphic onto the work area, from Pinpoint's menu bar, select Insert /
Image Library…
The Pinpoint Images window opens. From here, images can be located and inserted
onto the canvas.
Use the window on the left to navigate for a graphic file. When a file is selected, it
will be displayed in the window on the right. To place the graphic on the canvas,
select the Insert button. To insert a custom graphic, use the browse button.
22-48 Graphics
Inserting a Scale
Pinpoint has the options to insert Circular and Linear scales. The circular scale can
be incorporated with a gauge object and the linear scale can be incorporated with a
bar object which can create animated gauges.
Circular Scale Linear Scale
To insert a scale, from Pinpoint's menu bar, select Insert / Scale…
The Scale Properties window appears.

Inserting a Scale
Scale Properties
Linear:
Sets the scale to be linear.
Orientation:
Displays the scale as horizontal (side to side) or vertical (up and down).
Circular:
Sets the scale to be circular.
Start Angle:
The number of degrees from vertical.
Sweep Angle:
The degrees in a clockwise direction. The direction of the sweep angle is
clockwise regardless of the direction indicated in the Direction radio buttons.
Direction: Clockwise / Counter Clockwise

Select the radio button that indicates the direction the numbers are to appear on
the scale.
Clockwise - Causes the numbers to appear clockwise from low to high.
Counterclockwise - Causes the numbers to appear from low to high in a

counter clockwise direction.
Scale Color:
Select a color for the appearance of the scale.
Limits: High / Low

Enter the high and low limits of the scale. The limits can be positive or negative.
The High limit is the largest number displayed on the scale and the Low Limit is
the smallest number displayed on the scale.
Subdivisions: Numbers / Steps

Enter the number of subdivisions and steps that appear on the scale. Subdivisions
are the tiny tick marks between the steps, which are major tick marks.
Units: Text / Color

In the Text field, enter a short text string to display, as units, on the scale.
In the Color field, select a color for this text.
Show Numbers:
Displays numbers on the scale.
22-50 Graphics
Inserting a Scale
Scale Properties cont…
Decimal Places:
Enter the number (or select a number from the up and down arrow selection
buttons) of decimal places to display.
Color:
Select a color from the dropdown menu for the color the numbers are to appear.
Position:
In the Position field, select a position where the numbers are to appear. The
position depends on the type of scale selected:
Linear Horizontal: Select Top or Bottom.

Linear Vertical: Select Left or Right.
Circular: Select Inside or Outside.
Scale Variations Linear

horizontal
Circular
90 / 180
Circular
Linear
25 / 310
Vertical

22-52 Graphics
Appendix A Personnel
Editor
&
Templates
Chapter Contents
Enabling the Personnel Editor
Personnel Objects
Creating a Personnel Object
Personnel Editor
Personnel Templates
Personnel Template Folder
Creating a New Personnel Template
Personnel Template Editor
Creating a Personnel Object from a Template
A-2 Personnel Editor & Templates

Enabling the Personnel Editor
The Personnel Manager is enabled by default at each CyberStation workstation.
However, users can choose to enable the Personnel Editor instead of the Personnel
Manager.
1. Open your Workstations editor and go to the Preferences page.
2. Scroll down to the setting Use Personnel Manager and set it to False.
The Use Personnel Manager option offers a True or False Setting:
True (Use Personnel Manager)
False (Use Personnel Editor)
Schneider Electric - Buildings A-3

Personnel Objects
A Personnel object is a representation of a person and their access card. Personnel
objects are created and are used with door and area objects to create an access
security system.
Personnel objects contain three basic types of information:
Personal Information
Employee Information
Security Access Information
Creating a Personnel Object

1. From the Root of Continuum Explorer, create a New Folder and name it
CardHolderFolder
2. Right click on the CardHolderFolder and select New and then Personnel.
3. Enter an Object Name for the Personnel (Preferably the name of the person that
will be holding the card) and select Create.

The Personnel Editor
General Page
Name:
Enter, from left to right, a person's first name, middle name (if applicable) and last
name
State:
Select Enabled or Disabled.
When a Personnel object is Disabled, there is no access privileges within the
system.
Activation Date:
Not implemented.
Expiration Date:
Set an expiration Date and Time for this person's access card to disable.
PIN:
Sets a person's Personal Identification Number (PIN). The PIN must be unique.

Default Clearance Level:
Enter the clearance level that applies to all areas you assign to this person.
You can enter a value between 0 and 255, with 1 providing the greatest access and
255 providing the least access. Enter 0 if you do not want to assign a default
clearance level to this person.
You can override the Default Clearance Level for an individual area by entering a
different clearance level for the area when you assign the area to this person. You
assign areas to a personnel object and specify their clearance levels in the Areas
List page.
Visitor:
Select this option if this person is a visitor rather than a permanent employee.
ADA:
Select this option if the person requires assistance due to a disability.
This attribute will allow a door to remain open for a length of time specified in the
ADA configuration choices made in the Door editor.
Executive Privilege:
Check the Executive Privilege checkbox if you want this person to be able to
access any area assigned to him/her when the area, or a door to the area, is in the
Lockdown state.
Signature:
Displays this person's signature in a read-only box.

Credential 1 Page
Card Type:
Select this person's card type from the dropdown men.
Card Number:
Set to the number that is encoded on this person's card.
Site Code:
Set to the site code that is encoded on this person's card.
Mark Card as Lost:

Select this button if a person has lost an access card.
Continuum creates another personnel record for this individual with a ".lost" file
extension. If the card is used after being marked as lost, it will not open a door
and it logs into the Active Event as an Invalid Attempt.
Issue Temporary Card/Restore Permanent Card:

Select this button when issuing a temporary card to replace a lost card. The button
text changes to display "Restore Permanent Card".
Continuum puts the original card number back into the Card Number field.
Make/Edit Badge:
Starts the optional EpiSuite Integrated Badging to create or make changes to an
ID badge.

Area List Page
The Area List page is where Areas are added to which a person is allowed access.
The Area List displays the following information under specific columns:
Area:
The path and name of each area
Schedule:
The path and name of the schedule that controls each area
State:
The status of the area, either enabled or disabled, indicating whether or not the
area is currently accessible.
Template:
If set to true, this area was assigned to this personnel object through an attached
template and will be removed upon attachment to another template.
DeletePending:
Object has been deleted but the distribution to the controller has not yet occurred.
Workstation Validation Only:

If set to false, this personnel object's record is validated at the controller. If set to
true, this personnel object's record is validated by the access server. This option is
used if memory becomes a constraint in the controller.

Area List Page cont…
Add Areas Button:
This button opens a window that displays all selectable Areas within a system.
Holding down the CTRL key allows for multiple selections.
Add Area Button:

Allows the user to apply options to a cardholders Area.
Area:
Click the browse button in the Area field to search for and select the area that
you wish to add for this person.
Area Schedule:
Click the browse button in the Area Schedule field to search for and select
the schedule (InfinityNumeric) for that area.

Area List Page cont…
State:
Select the State from the dropdown menu (Enabled or Disabled).
Workstation Validation Only:

From the Workstation Validation Only dropdown menu, select True to specify
that this person's record (and access permission for this area) gets validated
only in the workstations serving as access servers, instead of being validated
by the local controller's database. This saves data storage space in the
controller. Use this option when controller memory is filling up with records
that do not utilize these areas very often.
Clearance Level:
Enter a value for Clearance Level if you want to override the person's default
clearance level specified in the General page. Leave the value at 0 if you do
not want to override the default clearance level for this person.
You can override the default clearance level if you want a person to have
access privileges in a specific area that are more or less restricted than the
access provided by the person's default clearance level.
Remove Area Button:

Removes the selected Area from the list.

Privileges Page
Zone Point:
Not implemented.
Custom Control Fields:

Not implemented.
Allow Anti-Pass:
Select this option to let this person access an area regardless of an Anti-Pass
violation.
If such a violation occurs, the event is recorded in the event log, but the person is
granted access to the area.
Disable Card if Not Used in Days:

Not implemented.

Employee Info Page
Settings in the Employee Information page are optional for convenient record keeping
purposes.
Department:
Specifies the name of the department for which this person works.
Dept Number:
Specifies the department number for which this person works. This is distributed
to the controller and can be used to set the Entry/Exit department number numeric
linked to the door.
Employee Number:
Specifies this person's employee number.
Supervisor:
Specifies the name of this person's supervisor.
Office Phone:
Specifies this person's office phone number.
Office Location:
Specifies the location of this person's office.

Employee Info Page cont…
Title:
Specifies this person's job title.
Parking Sticker:
Specifies the number of this person's parking sticker.
Vehicle Info:
Specifies vehicle information, such as year and make, for this person.
License:
Specifies this person's license number.
Social Security No:

Specifies this person's Social Security number.
Start Date:
Specifies the date this person started work.
Info1 - Info6:
Enter values as needed for these user-definable attributes. Your CyberStation
administrator may have customized the attribute names for your company.

Personnel Info Page
Address:
Enter this person's home street address.
City:
Enter the city in which this person lives.
State:
Enter the state in which this person lives.
ZIP:
Enter this person's ZIP code.
Country:
Enter the country in which this person lives.
Emergency:
Enter the name of this person's emergency contact.
Home Phone:
Enter this person's home phone number.
Date of Birth:
Enter this person's date of birth.
Hair Color:
Enter this person's hair color.

Personnel Info Page cont…
Eye Color:
Enter this person's eye color.
Height:
Enter this person's height.
Weight:
Enter this person's weight.
Sex:
Select this person's sex.
Blood Type:
Enter this person's blood type.

Current Status Page
Current Area:
Displays the last area entered by a person.
Current Security Zone:

Not implemented.
Last Door Entered:

Displays the object name of the last door a person went through using an access
card and/or access code.
Current Status:
Indicates whether this person's access card and/or access code are valid.
Time of Entry:
Displays date and time a person entered the area displayed for Current Area.

Access Events Page
The Access Events page displays all the events in the current access log that pertain
to this person. The events are loaded the first time the Access Events page is viewed.
Event Class:
Displays the type of access event that has occurred.
Time Stamp:
Displays the date and time at which the access event occurred.
Door:
Displays the name and path of the door with which the person caused the event.
Area:
Displays the area associated with this event.

Templates Page
The Templates page displays a list of personnel template objects that appear in the
Virtual View Templates folder of Continuum Explorer.
Use this Templates page to:
Add an area list configuration from a personnel template to a personnel object

that was not created with a template.
Change the area list configuration to that of a different personnel template.
If areas are added to this personnel object from the Area List page, they will not
change if the attached personnel template has been altered.
Add a Personnel Template:
1. Select the radio button next to the personnel template that contains the area to
apply.
2. Select the Apply button.
Remove a Personnel Template:
1. Select the radio button next to the personnel template to deselect the template.
2. Select the Apply button.

Custom Attributes Page
The Custom Attributes page shows any custom attributes that have been configured.
Custom Attributes are created and deleted in the Custom Attributes editor.

Personnel Templates
A template is an object with predefined attributes. Templates are used to create new
objects in the same manner a cookie cutter is to make many cookies that are the same
as each other. Continuum templates allow for quick and consistent creation of new
objects of the same class.
Templates prompt for an objects attribute values ahead of time. A template includes
values for most or all of the attributes for the object being created.
It is critical that the value for every attribute of an object is be defined as:
Copied From Template
Inherited From Template
Specified By User
Personnel Template Folder

Continuum provides a Personnel Templates folder for creating Personnel Templates.
The Templates will reside within this folder and be displayed as icons in the Viewing
pane.

Creating a New Personnel Template
1. From Continuum Explorer, right click on the Personnel Templates folder and
select New Template and then Personnel.
2. Enter the Object Name of the new template and select Create.

When creating a template, the object editor appears for the object class selected.
Template Information Page

In the Template Information page, enter a name and alias for all objects that will
be created from this template.
Name:
Enter a name that is as descriptive as possible. Descriptive names help future
users choose the correct templates from which to create objects.
Avoid using duplicate names: Continuum automatically avoids conflicts that

are caused by duplicate object names. If Continuum detects an existing object
with the same name, it appends an underscore and a number to the name of
the new object.
When Continuum finds an existing object, it renames the new object. The next
time the same template is used to create an object in the same container,
Continuum supplies the new object a name.
Alias:
Entering an Alias is optional. If left blank, Continuum uses the template's alias.

Attribute Data Source
The Attribute Data Source page is where a source is set for every attribute of the
objects that will be created from this template.
This page contains a list of all the attributes for the object. To the right of each
attribute is a text box with a default value (Either: CopyFromTemplate,
InheritFromTemplate, or SpecifiedByUser).
Copied From Template:

When an attribute is copied from a template, that attribute value is passed to the
new object that is being created from the template. An attribute can be changed
later, via its object editor, without affecting the template. Any changes to that
attribute in the template would not affect the copied attribute in any object created
from that template.

Attribute Data Source cont…
Inherited From Template:
Select this option if all objects created from this template are to inherit this
attribute value.
Attributes inherited from a template retain a link to the template. Changes to the
template "ripple" through all objects created from that template, whereby the
objects change whenever the template changes. Inherited attributes are an easy
way to maintain consistent attribute values across objects of the same class.
If changing an inherited attribute of an object created from a template, via its

object editor, Continuum protects the link and offers several choices of actions.
All inherited attributes within the objects created by a template are automatically
changed when editing the template. When changing a template the following
dialog box appears:
Selecting Yes prompts for each object created by the template.
Selecting No changes all objects at once.
Selecting Cancel will not change anything.

Attribute Data Source cont…
Specified By User:
Continuum prompts for the attribute value when creating an object from the
template.
Changing the Attribute Data Source Value:

1. When changing an attributes value, select its default value under the Data
Source column.
A down arrow for a dropdown menu appears.
2. Select the down arrow and then the appropriate option.

Creating a Personnel Object from a Template
To create a personnel object from a template:
1. Open the Personnel Templates folder.
2. Drag the desired template object onto the Card Holder folder.
3. Select OK from the Confirm Operation window.
4. Fill in the prompted attributes for the personnel object.

10/25/2011

Configuracion Andover

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Configuracion Andover

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Configuration (Engineering)

 2011, Schneider Electric

Produced in the United States of America.

Continuum Configuration (Engineering)

A: Personnel Editor & Templates

Schneider Electric - Buildings

Local Area Network (LAN) Architecture

1-2 Continuum Architecture

The hardware consists of equipment controllers, network communication controllers,

Continuum Workstation NetController

Infinet Controller I/O Module

Schneider Electric - Buildings 1-3

CyberStation workstation with MSDE Database

Input / Output (I/O) Modules

The NetController/ACX/bCX1/9702 use Ethernet TCP/IP protocol to communicate with

Power Supply & NetController II

ACC I/O Bus

Comm 1 Infinet Comm 2 Infinet

1-4 Continuum Architecture

Schneider Electric - Buildings 1-5

Standard CAT5 cable

1-6 Continuum Architecture

Schneider Electric - Buildings 1-7

Starting Continuum and Logging On

2-2 Starting Continuum

1. To start Continuum from the Windows desk top, select:

Start \ Programs \ Continuum \ Continuum

Schneider Electric - Buildings 2-3

2. The Continuum logon window will appear.

User Name: Enter your user name

Password: Enter your password

If a password change is required, ask the Continuum Administrator for

3. Select the OK button to complete the logon.

Continuum Main Screen

2-4 Starting Continuum

Schneider Electric - Buildings 2-5

2. The Continuum logon window appears.

User Name: Enter your user name

Password: Enter your password

If a password change is required, ask the Continuum Administrator for

3. Select the OK button to complete the logon.

2-6 Starting Continuum

Changing Menu Pages

Accessing the Help System

The Main Help Window

Navigating the Help System

The Browse Sequence

The Menu Table

3-2 Menu Pages & Help System

Schneider Electric - Buildings 3-3

Move you to another menu page

3-4 Menu Pages & Help System

Main Menu Buttons

Main Menu Buttons

* Opens a Menu Page

* Opens a Menu Page

* Opens a Menu Page

* Opens a Menu Page

* Navigates to another menu page

Schneider Electric - Buildings 3-5

3-6 Menu Pages & Help System

When an Operator is denied access to a particular function, a dialog box, similar to